JP7327607B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in a jackpot lottery. Also, the game set value may be suggested to the player by a predetermined effect.

JP-A-2000-024234

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the level of attention and interest in the game to increase the player's willingness to play.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the level of attention and interest in a game, thereby increasing the willingness of the player to play the game.

The game machine according to the present invention is
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
storage means for storing performance information serving as an indicator of ball output performance;
performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means;
a first position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is invisible or difficult to see from a specific front direction; visibility limiting means movable between a second position visible from
a regulating means for limiting movement of the visual recognition restricting means from the first position to the second position;
with
The visibility restriction means makes at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction of the front when a specific condition is satisfied,
When the movement start condition is satisfied in the special game state, it becomes possible to move the visual recognition restricting means from the first position to the second position,
The performance information display means is configured to display the performance information even in a state in which the visibility restriction means is at the first position,
In addition to the performance information display means, a production display means for production is provided,
It is characterized in that the performance information can be displayed by the performance information display means even when the performance display by the performance display means is being performed.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine based on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main controller. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main controller; The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display example on a performance display monitor of the performance information display device; The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by a main controller; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of starting winning processing executed in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 13; FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a first pending command setting process executed in the starting winning process of FIG. 14; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of main processing executed by a main controller; Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in the main process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. Flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation start process executed in the variation game control process of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game set value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 20; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an operation data table showing the relationship between operation detection patterns and operation situations; FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27; FIG. 31. It is a figure which shows an example of a 1st stop design selection table and a variation classification table which are used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. FIG. 32 shows an example of an effect pattern type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a ball output suggestive image display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the game setting value suggestion character classification which suggests a game setting value. FIG. 35 shows an example of a game set value suggesting character selection table used in the ball output suggesting image display process of FIG. 34 ; FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball output performance suggestive image display process of FIG. 34; FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the ball output performance suggestive image display process of FIG. 34; The figure which shows an example of the ball-out performance suggestion image displayed on a sub image display part in a variation game. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31; The figure which shows an example of the opening basic production|presentation selection table used by the opening production|presentation determination processing performed by the jackpot game production|presentation determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the rank suggestion image classification which suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery frequency. A diagram showing an example of a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used in the opening effect determination process. The figure which shows an example of the opening screen in a jackpot game. FIG. 40 shows an example of an ending basic effect selection table and a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used in the ending effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process. The figure which shows an example of the ending screen in a jackpot game. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing execution mode production|presentation scenario selection table used by the opening/closing execution mode production|presentation determination processing performed by the jackpot game production|presentation determination processing of FIG. A diagram showing an example of an opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process. A diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table and a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table used in the open/close execution mode effect determination process. The figure which shows an example of the round game screen of the opening-and-closing execution mode in a jackpot game. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27; The figure which shows the other example of the ball-out performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows the other example of the ball-out performance suggestion image in a variable game. The figure which shows the other example of the round game screen of the opening-and-closing execution mode in a jackpot game. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing; The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a jackpot game production process. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57 . 57. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball output suggestive image display process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a ball output suggestive image display process in the command determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention; The figure which shows an example of the point table and total point rank corresponding table which are used by the ball output suggestive image display process. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a total point suggesting character selection table referred to in the ball output suggesting image display process of FIG. 60; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a ball output suggestive image display process in the command determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank correspondence table, and FIG. 64(B) is a diagram showing an example of an expected value rank suggesting character selection table used in the ball output performance suggesting image display process of FIG. The front view showing an example of the game board of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 66 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65; The perspective view which shows an example of the crun device of the game machine shown in FIG. 68(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X1-X1 section line of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68(B) is a cross-sectional view along the X2-X2 section line of FIG. FIG. 69(A) is a front view showing the stay box and its surroundings when the stay box is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69(B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. 69(A), and FIG. A) is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 cutting line. FIG. 70(A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(B) showing the stay box and its periphery when the stay box is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70(B) is the stay box when the stay box is at the lower limit position. 69(C) shows the stay box and its surroundings, and FIG. 70(C) shows the stay box and its surroundings when the stay box is at the intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. FIG. 70(D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(C) showing the stay box and its periphery when the stay box is at the intermediate position; FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65; FIG. 72(A) is a front view showing an example of a special main display section, and FIG. 72(B) is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display section. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the visual recognition state of the special main display portion at downward movement levels 0 to 2; 74(A) and 74(A) are diagrams schematically showing the visual recognition state of the special main display portion at downward movement levels 3 and 4, and FIG. 74(C) shows the number of staying game balls in the staying box and the staying box. The figure which shows the relationship with the downward movement level of . FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed in a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75; FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box lowering processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 76; FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box return processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75; FIG. The front view which shows an example of the crun device of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and its periphery. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view along the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. 79; FIG. 81(A) is a perspective view showing an example of the special main display section and the translucent monitor, and FIG. 81(B) shows an example of the relationship between the visibility level of the translucent monitor and the visibility state of the special main display section. FIG. 81(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out ball count number and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of sub timer interrupt processing executed in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82; FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of visibility control processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of a light shielding control process procedure executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 82; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the relationship between the visibility level and the visibility state of the special main display section; FIG. 87A is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between a plurality of areas and the viewing state of the special main display portion, and FIG. 87B is another example of the relationship between the viewing level and the viewing state of the special main display portion. illustration. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the gaming machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view along the X5-X5 cutting line in FIG. 88; FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 when the forced ejection member is in the operating position; Sectional view of an area including a stay box and a special main display section in the gaming machine. 92(A) and 92(B) are diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the downward movement level of the retention box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and FIG. 92(C) is a translucency monitor. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a visual recognition control state of the special main display section by FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of stay box operation check processing executed by the sound lamp control device. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of an error processing procedure executed in the staying box operation check processing of FIG. 94; FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box lowering processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 76; FIG. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box return processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, first to fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. Moreover, each of the following embodiments is an example that embodies the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51. FIG.

[Schematic Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, and a back pack unit 1.
3 and an outer frame 14, and is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14 to an island facility (not shown) of the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine. The present invention can also be applied to game machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the outer frame 14 . Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by being rotatably supported at the left end by the front frame 11 . Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 at its left end.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, and a panel 25.
, a speaker 26, an electric decoration part 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23 . The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not the operation button 20 is pressed. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 5, the operation button 20
It is possible to determine the operation state (with operation and without operation) of the . This operation button 20
is an operation button presentation triggered by the operation of the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined specific period in the variable game presentation executed in the variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery to the player, etc. is manipulated to execute

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it is a position where the player can operate. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

Also, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player may be provided. Also, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button presentation or the like in the variable game presentation.

The shooting handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to shoot the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is played by shooting a game ball from a game ball shooting mechanism 32 described later with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the shooting handle 22 is operated by the player, 1 every 0.6 sec.
A game ball shooting mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that game balls are shot toward the game area.

The upper tray 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and is attached to the dispensing device 1 of the dispensing mechanism 130, which will be described later.
It is used to store the game balls put out from 32 and guide the stored game balls to the game ball shooting mechanism 32 in a state of aligning them in one line. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used to store surplus game balls on the upper plate 23 .

The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10 . The speaker 26 is mounted on the front frame 11
It is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the, and executes a sound output effect of outputting sound. In addition, the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11 . In addition, the illumination section 27 incorporates a light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs lamp effects according to a lighting color and a blinking mode such as lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332 . In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub-control unit 332 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4 , the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311 , an outer rail 312 , and a general prize-winning slot 3 .
13, first prize winning port 314, second prize winning port 315, variable winning port 316, through gate 317,
An out port 318, a variable display unit 34 and a main display section 37 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out game balls shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board surface of the game board 31 . And inner rail 3
11 and the outer rail 312, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second
Game balls that do not enter the winning hole 315 or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. - 特許庁

Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes, as shown in FIG.
22, and a solenoid 323. The launching rail 321 is formed from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 is directed to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It guides. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the launch rail 321 one by one. Solenoid 323 is connected to firing rail 321
It is driving means for shooting game balls supplied upward toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 . In the gaming machine 10 , the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 to the game board 31 .
In addition, the game ball shooting mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for shooting game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323 .

Returning to the description of FIG. 4 , the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. And on the back side of the game board 31, corresponding to each of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected. Incoming ball sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided.
In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, which will be described later. is detected by the out-ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5). Also, through gate 317
is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting game balls passing through the through gate 317. FIG. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when hitting to the right.

The entering ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are sent to the main control unit 331. is entered. Main control unit 331
(MPU 41) is the payout control device 7 according to the detection results of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a
sends a command to pay out game balls. Below, ball entry sensors 313a to 317
Detecting the entry of a game ball by a is sometimes referred to as winning. Also, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41 ) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35 . The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls shot onto the game board 31 by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 . Incidentally, the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a and the outgoing ball sensor 35 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but they may be arbitrary sensors capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls by other detection methods. may

In addition, the second prize winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessary 315b for switching whether or not the entry of the game ball into the second prize winning port 315 is restricted. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. FIG. Then, on the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b opens to allow the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 315, and the electric role 315b closes to allow the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 315. ball is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 316b for switching whether or not to limit the entry of game balls into the variable winning opening 316 . The opening/closing door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. Then, on the game board 31, the opening/closing door 316b is opened to allow the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening/closing door 3
16b is closed, entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316 is restricted.

In the gaming machine 10, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery when the entry of a game ball into the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display section 37 according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Also, the main control unit 331
The result of the lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the result of the lottery.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the game ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize opening 314 or the second prize opening 315 is 3, and the ball enters the variable prize opening 316. The number of prize balls in this case is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the state shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is opened. ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the result of the lottery is winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes 5R
Jackpot game state (5R normal jackpot game state and 5R probability variable jackpot game state), and 1
6R probability variable jackpot gaming state is included. In the 5R jackpot game state, a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning opening 316 is performed five times. It is a game state including the opening and closing execution mode that is performed. The 16R variable jackpot game state is a game state including an opening and closing execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than the 5R jackpot game state, and the 5R jackpot game state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

The variable display unit 34 has a pattern display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31 . The pattern display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the pattern display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332 . Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the first
Various displays such as symbol variation display and variable game effect display are performed according to the lottery result of the big win lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry of the ball into the winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 . It should be noted that the pattern display section 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention.
Also, the pattern display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the diagonal direction. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the main designs.
Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of main symbols "1" to "9".

In the game machine 10, in the variation game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time elapses from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

When the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or a plurality of active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol indicates or suggests the lottery result of the big win lottery by the main control unit 331. - 特許庁For example, if the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the state where the main patterns of the same pattern are lined up on the effective line is displayed, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. In addition, although the jackpot type may be indicated by the combination of main symbols on the activated line, it is not necessarily indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit", the state where the symbol combination of "777", for example, which is set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation big hit among the main symbols, is lined up on the effective line. is displayed, or a state in which the same symbol combinations other than "777" are lined up on the activated line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", a state in which a pattern combination such as "333", for example, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot among the main patterns, is lined up on the effective line is displayed. ruka,
A state is displayed in which combinations of the same symbols other than a combination of symbols indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" and "333" are lined up on the effective line. In addition, if the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of symbols such as "222" and "444", which are set in advance as a pattern combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main patterns, indicating a probability variable jackpot A state in which combinations of the same symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of main symbols are lined up on the activated line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

Also, in the symbol display section 341, along with the variation display of the main symbols in the variation game, a variation game effect is displayed that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big win lottery will be a big win. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot" and the state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination showing the 16R probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed,
As the variable game performance, a suggestive performance suggesting a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the big win game effect, promotion effect is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable big win. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the main pattern combination indicating the probability variable jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, as a variable game effect,
A suggestive effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game production, a promotion production or the like is executed to indicate that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot.

Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening/closing execution mode effect and an ending effect.

In the left area on the front side of the pattern display section 341, the sub-image display section 3 such as a liquid crystal display is displayed.
8 is provided. In this sub-image display section 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display section 341 in a variation game or a jackpot game. Also, in the sub-image display section 38, an effect is executed to suggest to the player information (performance information) relating to ball payout performance in a variation game or a jackpot game. Details of the performance information will be described later, but this performance information includes, for example, game setting values, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, consecutive role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like.
The sub image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, plasma display,
An organic EL display or the like may be used, or a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display may be used.

Also, the game board 31 may be provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensors are provided around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316, for example.
The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when a magnet is used to fraudulently guide a game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316, the fraud can be detected. On the other hand, radio wave sensors are provided around the first prize winning port 314 and the second prize winning port 315, for example. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331 , and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331 . As a result, when an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the entering ball sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entering of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. In addition, the radio wave sensor
For example, radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz can be detected.

The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371 arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374. FIG. The LED pair 371 activates the electric accessory 31 in the main control unit 331 with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger.
A lottery result as to whether or not to open 5b is displayed by a combination of lighting and lighting (lighting pattern). On the 7-segment display 372, the winning of the first prize winning port 314 triggers a variable display of symbols, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. On the 7-segment display 373, the winning of the second prize winning port 315 triggers a variable display of symbols, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the big win lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of pending and the number M of pending variable display caused by the winning of the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 1
40.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23 . Incidentally, when the game balls on the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 5 , the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7 , a launch control device 8 and a power control device 9 . The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The shooting control device 8 operates the game ball shooting mechanism 3 according to the operation of the shooting handle 22.
2. The power control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10 .

[System Configuration of Gaming Machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5 , the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of games in the gaming machine 10 . The main controller 4 executes a big win lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset big win gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42 and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of main control means of the present invention. Moreover, ROM411 and RAM412 are incorporated in MPU41. The MPU 41 executes processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4 . In addition, the input/output I/F 42 has an incoming ball sensor 313a.
317a, the out-ball sensor 35, the main display section 37, and the like are connected. Then, the MPU 41 selects the general winning port 3 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a.
13, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, variable winning port 316, and through gate 31
Judging whether or not the ball is entered into 7. The MPU 41 also counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35 . Furthermore, the input/output I/F 42 is connected with the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 provides the sound lamp control device 5 with a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game set value Output commands such as a change command and a unit jackpot lottery number update command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation display time and the lottery result of the big win lottery to the voice lamp control device 5, and includes information on the type of big win when the lottery result of the big win lottery is a big win. The variation pattern command is set at step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. be. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 5 is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b described later increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, the variation pattern, and This command notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. FIG. The first pending command and the second pending command are set based on information stored in a pending storage area 412b described later when the pending number N or the pending number M increases (see FIG. 15 below). Step S1207 or step S1 of the first pending command setting process
209).

A shift command is issued in the first reservation area REA1 if the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases.
~ 4th reservation area REA4 or 1st reservation area REB1 ~ It is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 that the success or failure information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the 4th reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command is entered in step S in the data setting process of FIG. 18, which will be described later.
Set at 1508 .

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. is set in the game state transition process in the main process of . In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, the jackpot game is started by the sound lamp control device 5 receiving the jackpot game start command. It is possible to grasp not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the sound lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , It is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 to be described later. In the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is finished by the round game start command and the opening/closing execution mode is started. Alternatively, the opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 .

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.

The game set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the game set value after the change. is set in

The unit jackpot lottery count update command is a fixed number of minus difference balls (for example, minus 25
The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery has been received) triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 314. , and is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21, which will be described later.

Commands other than the commands described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

The main control unit 4 also includes an oscillator circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41 . The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal with a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit to generate the MPU.
Enter 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a preset interval (for example, 4 msec
), and the MPU 41 detects the rise (or fall) of the clock signal
It is assumed that the main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started and executed each time a is generated. The oscillator circuit and the frequency divider circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operating clocks of the control bodies in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 . Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 .

A ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. A RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various types of information.
It is used as a temporary storage area (work area) for processing executed by U41. for example,
The RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a of the RAM 412, the reservation storage area 412b, and the electrician reservation area 412c to set the jackpot lottery and the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a contains a jackpot random number counter C used for jackpot winning lottery.
1, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when judging the losing type. In addition, the lottery counter 412
In a, the random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1
and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display portion 37 and the pattern display portion 341. FIG. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is to be in the open state are set. and a normal winning initial value counter CIN2 used for . Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB,
and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1,
It includes a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a big winning lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the 7 segment display 372 performs variable display and stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game. be. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the 7 segment display 373 displays and stops is referred to as the second special symbol game. be.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. Acquired as success or failure information used in the lottery, the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA
stored in either Also, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the RAM
Information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in 412 is acquired as the win/fail information used in the jackpot lottery, and is stored in the second reservation storage area REB. It is stored in one of the 1st reservation area REB1 to the 4th reservation area REB4. The acquisition process of the right/fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, corresponding to each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB, the lottery counter 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C
2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1) may be provided separately.

Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2
, and in addition to the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area RE
B is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4.

Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the success/failure information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB In addition to the lottery result of the pattern display unit 34
It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed in 1.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the winning/failing information is the first reservation area R
It is stored in an empty area in order of priority of EA1, second reservation area REA2, third reservation area REA3, and fourth reservation area REA4. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 in which the success/failure information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the success/failure information is displayed in the first reservation area REB
1, 2nd reservation area REB2, 3rd reservation area REB3, and 4th reservation area REB4 in order of priority. A first reservation area RE is stored in the reservation number storage area NAB.
The number of pieces of information stored in B1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 is stored as the number M of reservations.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4, and the first
A total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 hold up to four win/fail information as the winning history for the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 respectively. Is possible.

In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315 are provided with a holding area with a maximum holding number of eight.
It is possible to reserve the success/failure information as the winning history for up to a period of time. The memory processing of the right or wrong information is
It is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the win/fail information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the success/failure information in the first pending area REA1 of the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

In addition, the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA
and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more, the value of the reservation area with the larger number is given priority to the execution area Moving to the AE is another possible embodiment. In addition, the first reserved storage area RE
It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the success/failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of A and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variation game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on numerical information stored as success/failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the second
The success/failure information stored in the reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, the success/failure information stored in the third reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted. The information is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success/failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is stored in the first reserved area REB.
1, and the success/failure information stored in the third reservation area REB3 is stored in the second reservation area REB2.
, and the success/failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1
It is periodically updated and stored in the reservation storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. - 特許庁

The value of the random number used to win the jackpot is set in two types corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode, which is the probability variable gaming state, by the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area of the ROM 411 . Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode validity table corresponding to the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode validity table corresponding to the high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B), the low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each have a probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be a big win (jackpot probability) as the game set value. A plurality of hit/fail tables are provided which are different depending on the situation. The low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table each include four success/failure tables corresponding to game set values 1 to 4 in four stages. In the order of game set value 4, game set value 3, game set value 2, and game set value 1, the lottery result in the big winning lottery has a high jackpot probability and is advantageous to the player.

At the game set value 1, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode. There are 824 (0 to 823) probability mode propriety tables.
That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/
65536), and about 1/
79.5 (824/65536).

At the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 213 (0 to 212) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 213 (0 to 212) for the high probability mode. There are 852 (0 to 851) probability mode propriety tables.
That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/307.7 (213/
65536), and about 1/
76.9 (852/65536).

At the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 220 (0 to 219) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 220 (0 to 219) for the high probability mode. There are 880 (0 to 879) probability mode success/failure tables.
That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/297.9 (220/
65536), and about 1/
74.5 (880/65536).

At the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is 227 (0 to 226) for the low probability mode success/failure table, and 227 (0 to 226) for the high probability mode. There are 908 (0 to 907) probability mode correctness tables.
That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/288.7 (227/
65536), and about 1/
72.2 (908/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than those random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

Here, in the low-probability mode success/failure table and the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is also considered that the random numbers that result in a big win are common to the lottery results of the jackpot lottery between the same game set values, but that the random numbers that result in a big win are not common. be done. Also, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values, but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

In addition, four low-probability mode success/failure tables and four high-probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to the four levels of game settings, but at least one success/failure table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting is not limited to four stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game settings in multiple stages, and to provide one high-probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of settings for the low-probability mode and to make the jackpot probability uniform without providing step-wise game settings for the high-probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode may be made uniform, and multiple levels of game settings may be provided for the high-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserve storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.例文帳に追加In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of two jackpot types, ie, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the allocation table. In the example shown in FIG. 7(C),
When the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning port 314,
The number of random numbers for the 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 from 0 to 9, the number of random numbers for the 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers for the 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. is one. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R probability variable jackpot is five of 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variable jackpot and There are 10 random numbers from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that will be a 5R normal jackpot is 15.
5 of ∼19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop definite variable machine in which the probability of the definite variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Also, the gaming machine 10
, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode),
Compared to the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and normal gaming state (low-probability mode and non-high-frequency support mode), expect to win game balls when the lottery results in the jackpot lottery result in a big hit. value is set high.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning are individually shaken. A minute table is set, and game balls
Although the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which one of the above wins, it is conceivable that the jackpot type distribution probability is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop variable machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two type mixing machine, or the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", "5R normal It is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize winning port 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an open/close execution mode is executed in which round games are repeated 16 times in the jackpot game.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the machine shifts to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening an electric accessory 315b. And, in this embodiment, the probability variation gaming state is MP
This is continued until U41 determines that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is ``5R probability variable jackpot'', ``16R probability variable jackpot'' or ``5R normal jackpot''.

On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low-probability mode with a low jackpot winning probability and a high-frequency support mode with a high opening probability of the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times, such as 50 times or 100 times. The game continues until the game is completed, or ends when the player informs the player that the lottery result in the lottery for the big win is a big win before the specified number of times has passed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop variable machine, after the jackpot game at the time of the variable probability big hit is completed, a preset specified number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) jackpot If the lottery is executed in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and the high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible to perform a falling lottery from the probability variable game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state in the variable game as another embodiment. It should be noted that, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three kinds of jackpot types, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types, such as Round Regular Jackpot, 16R Regular Jackpot.

In addition, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example,
It wraps back to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and at the timing when the game ball enters the first prize winning port 314 or the second prize winning port 315, the reserve storage area 41
2b.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Specifically, according to the loss type table stored in the loss type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the occurrence of the reach, the final stop symbol shifts to the front and back of the reach symbol by one and stops, and the same reach occurs. The value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 is set for each of the three kinds of loss types, namely, the ready-to-win except before and after the final stop pattern stops before and after the ready-to-win pattern, and the complete loss without the occurrence of the ready-to-win.

Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the exclusion type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the value of the random number that becomes the front and back reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front and back is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes complete deviation is 39. ~238. In addition, the MPU 41 judges that reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the ready-to-win indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to occur during the period from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a variable state that In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, during the change state of the reach in the symbol display section 341, a story production process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the production. A person-participation type operation rendering process and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged size during execution of these rendering processes.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317, the electric role reservation area 41 in the RAM 412
2c. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric role product 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric role product opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is possible to win, and if the electric accessory open counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is possible to lose.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result of the big win lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type,
In the voice ramp control device 5, rough variable game effects such as high-speed variable effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, special reach effects, etc.
It is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is M
It is updated once each time a main process, which will be described later, is executed by the PU 41, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is changed to the reservation storage area 41 at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.
2b.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Concretely, MPU41, ROM4
The type of variation pattern is specified by referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or a failure variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of 11. Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 8(A), 8(B) and 8(C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table and an off variation table. Fig. 8(A), Fig. 8(
As shown in B) and FIG. 8(C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, and loss fluctuation table, fluctuation patterns are associated in advance according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Then, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the lottery. If the result is "out", the outlier fluctuation table is referred to and the type of fluctuation pattern is specified.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variable jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern "
01” to “03” are selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 sets the variation display time to 3 as the variation type (effect pattern type).
A normal ready-to-win effect pattern of 0s is determined, and the normal ready-to-win effect pattern is executed in the symbol display section 341 . The normal reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the normal reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super ready-to-win effect pattern with a variable display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), pattern is executed. The super reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the super reach production. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display section 341 determines the special reach pattern. A production pattern is executed. The special reach production pattern is a production pattern in which the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production.

As shown in FIG. 8(C), in the loss variation table, the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding relationship with the variation pattern are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of deviation is front-rear out-of-reach reach or front-rear out-of-rear reach, one of the variation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of deviation is complete deviation, either variation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern "
04” is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variable display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the pattern display section 341 determines the non-reach performance pattern. An effect pattern is executed (see FIG. 27). Further, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach performance pattern (non-reach performance pattern) with a variable display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and displays the pattern. In the part 341, the non-reach effect pattern is executed.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "04",
A variation display of a failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped and stopped at a pattern is executed without an advance notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. In addition, in the game machine 10, as the variation display at the time of failure corresponding to the variation pattern "05", there is a variation display of the failure pattern in which the variation display is stopped with a symbol, accompanied by an advance notice effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of loss corresponding to the variation pattern "05" is performed, a player-participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as an advance notice effect.

Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8(A), 8(B) and 8(C). Further, the probability variable jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and any one of them is selected. A normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super ready-to-win effects to be executed in the super ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. Any Super Reach effect that has been done is executed. The super reach effect is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach effect, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is higher than the normal reach effect, and the jackpot is won more than the special reach effect. Executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special ready-to-win effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as special ready-to-win effects to be executed in the special ready-to-win effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "03". Any of the special reach effects that have been performed are executed. The special ready-to-win effect is a ready-to-win effect with a longer fluctuation time than the normal ready-to-win effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, the normal ready-to-win effect or the super ready-to-win effect. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot is higher than in the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

Note that the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the state of operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which a single operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation of the operation button 20 by the player. A player-participation type operation effect such as a repeated hitting operation effect in which repeated hitting operations are reflected in the effect, and a long-pressing operation effect in which the long-pressing operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 and the pattern display section 341, it issues a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Input to the audio lamp controller 5 . Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 provides a variation pattern command " A01” to “A03” are output. Also, the MPU 41
If the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "B01" to "B" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03"
03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the variation patterns "01" to "03". to output one of "C03". In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern "01" to "0
Variation pattern commands "D01" to "D0
5” is output. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command. Determine the details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in . Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the pattern display unit 341 to perform a variable display based on the details of the determined variable mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the big winning lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the pattern display section 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 9 shows the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG.
is a block diagram showing an example of a game information storage area 412d set to . The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d stores "out ball number", "general winning hole payout ball number", "first winning hole payout ball number", and "second winning hole payout ball number". ”, “Variable number of winning balls paid out”, “Game setting value”, “Base information”, “Continuous role information”, “Accessory ratio information”, “Accumulated number of jackpot lotteries”, “Number of unit jackpot lottery movements” ”, “number of times of big hits”, and “number of consecutive losses” are stored. Among these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous role ratio information", "accessory ratio information", and "number of unit jackpot lottery movements"
corresponds to the game information (performance information) related to the performance of putting out balls.

The "number of out balls" is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot to the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode, not high frequency support mode). This "number of out balls"
is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out-balls detected by the out-ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13, which will be described later.

The "general winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the general winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low-probability mode, not high-frequency support mode). This "general winning hole payout number of balls" is set by the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win. .

The "number of balls paid out to the first winning opening" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode, not high-frequency support mode). . This "first winning hole payout number of balls" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the first winning hole 314 in the command setting process update to.

"Second winning hole payout ball number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state (state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode). . This "number of balls to be paid out to the second winning hole" is determined when the ball sensor 315a detects a winning to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current win when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the second prize winning port 315 in the command setting process update to

“Variable winning hole payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning to the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state (state of high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "variable number of payout balls from the winning opening" is determined by the entering ball sensor 31 in the jackpot game state.
6a detects the winning to the variable winning opening 316, in the winning ball command setting process of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. When setting the prize ball command to be performed by the payout control device 7,
It is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by winning this time.

In addition, the "number of out balls", "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening", "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening", "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening", and "number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening" are shown in the figure below. 21 specific performance information update process, when the "number of out balls" reaches 60000 (step S1806: Yes),
It is cleared to 0 ball (step S1810).

The "game setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (determination of success/failure). . In other words, the "game set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, four stages of game settings (four types of low-probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 7A) and high-probability mode success/failure tables (
(see FIG. 7(B))) is prepared. The "game set value" is updated in the game set value change process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "base information" is information related to the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode), and this "base" is the normal game state. It is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" to the "out ball number". Expressing "base" in a formula, "base" =
100×(“the number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening”+“the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening”)/“the number of out balls”. “Base information” is the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the two previous 60,000 ball base B
Includes information on 2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out-balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21 (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the number of most recent out balls is 60
The "base" when reaching 000 balls is the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the "base" when the number of out-balls before reaching 60,000 balls is the 60,000-ball base B2 of the time before last. It is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area. Also, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (
Step S1803), the current base BL is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. FIG.

In addition, in this embodiment, "base information" is "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B
1” and “Two previous 60,000-ball base B2”, and the past two 60,000-ball bases are recorded as a history, but even if the past 3 or more 60,000-ball bases are recorded as a history, good. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall up to the present.

"Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all the winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). , it is information related to the "continuous accessory ratio", which is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning opening.
Expressing the "continuous role ratio" as a formula, "continuous role ratio" = 100 x "variable number of payout balls"
/ "total number of balls to be paid out". "Continuous role product ratio information" is updated, for example, in specific performance information update processing in FIG. 21, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous role ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state. , a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous role ratio information" is the cumulative continuous role ratio,
It may include both the continuous accessory ratio for a fixed number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) , and "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls of the number of paid out balls of the second winning opening and the number of paid out balls of the variable winning opening. Expressing the "character ratio" as a formula, "character ratio" = 100 x (
"Number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening" + "Number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning opening")/"Total number of balls to be paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the “accessory ratio information” is stored as the accumulated accessory ratio from the installation of the gaming machine 10 in the game hall up to the present. Note that the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), for a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be a role ratio to the number of out balls reaching a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous role product ratio information" may include both the cumulative role product ratio and the role product ratio for a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is the number of It is the number of times the jackpot lottery was performed. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is the cumulative variation display count in which the pattern variation display on the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is triggered by the winning of the first winning port 314 in the normal game state. be. The "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. 19, which will be described later. In addition, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is a jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). The number of times received (the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37
is the number of times the symbol variation display has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of pattern variations displayed on the 7-segment display 372 averaging 1000 yen (the number of jackpot lotteries received) when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen in a gaming hall. be. The "unit jackpot lottery count" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The “unit jackpot lottery count” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "unit jackpot lottery number of times" is
It is stored as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from when the game machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. It should be noted that the "number of unit jackpot lotteries" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal game state, It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both the accumulated unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The "number of big wins" is the number of times the lottery result of the big win lottery has been a big win since the game machine 10 was activated before the opening of the game hall. The "number of big hits" is incremented by one each time the game state is shifted to the big win game state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.
Also, the “number of times of big wins” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

The "number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are consecutive losses in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not the high-frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot. cleared to 0 times. The "number of consecutive failures" is the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 to be described later. If it is out, it is incremented by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times.
In this embodiment, the “number of consecutive failures” is stored in the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the gaming machine 10 .
is cleared from the game information storage area 412d. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the description of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "game setting values" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. be. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46 and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is expanded (see FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 4
31 to 434, which is called 4-digit 7-seg. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331. may be provided in It is also conceivable to use the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 to display the “base information”.

The 7-segment displays 431-434 are capable of displaying numbers "0"-"9" and alphabets "A"-"F". In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8", and the alphabet "D" is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number "0" when displaying, a dot is lit and "0." is displayed. Also, when any one of the alphabets "A" to "F" is displayed, it is conceivable to light up dots to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

The performance display monitor 43 displays the left two 7-segment displays 431-434 of the four 7-segment displays 431-434.
The segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. is. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, then the current base BL
The abbreviation "BL" is displayed as "8."
The segment indicators 433 and 434 display the base value "31" as "3" and "1". That is, in the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, in order from the left, "
8. , “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by pressing the switch, and is located at an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, enabling the performance display monitor 43 to display the base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are de-energized and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided in a place other than the main controller 4 .

Here, FIG. 11 is an example of display on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 11(B) to 11(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 is displayed as "base information". The ball base B1→the 60,000 ball base B2 the last time before→the current base BL is looped in order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 11(B) indicates that the current base BL is 28%, and FIG.
) shows that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434
is extinguished, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, e.g. A program for sequentially displaying BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the second-last 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is executed by the MPU 41 in the main controller 4.
are stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the . Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Further, a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. FIG.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, in place of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", "continuous role ratio information" and "player ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may be displayed.

Moreover, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, the game set value display unit 45 selects the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(B)) to be referenced in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned game set values for the game, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the game set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display. You may make it display a game setting value.

The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and enables change of the game set value by a rotation operation when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The setting value change operation unit 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches the contact by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of display on the game set value display section 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the game set value display unit 45 is in the off state and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized and the game set value is displayed. A number is displayed on the display unit 45 . The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game set value display unit 45 is lit, the power supply to the 7-segment display is interrupted and the game set value display unit 45 is turned off. state.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the game set value display unit 45 is in the lighting state and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated, the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is changed. be done. In the illustrated example, when the game set value display portion 45 is rotated to the right, the number displayed on the game set value display portion 45 increases, and when the game set value display portion 45 is rotated to the left, the game set value is displayed. The number displayed in section 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game set value display portion 45 is changed by rotating the game set value display portion 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the game set value. be. Therefore,
When the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed to turn off the power of the 7-segment display while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the game set value. As a result, the MPU 41
is a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7A) or a high-probability mode success/failure table (FIG.
(B) reference) can be based on big hit lottery.

The method of changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game set value display portion 45 after rotating the set value change operation portion 46 . For example, a method of determining a game set value by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1),
A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by repeatedly hitting or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1);
A method of inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the game machine and rotating the key to change the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 and then removing the key may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5 , the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on control signals input from the main control unit 331, the symbol display section 341 displays and Execute the presentation display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. MPU51
is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. In addition, the MPU 51 has a ROM
511 and RAM 512 are incorporated.

A ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp flashing patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51 . Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 executes the processing according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by means of the MPU 51, thereby issuing a command to the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (control signal) is input, and the pattern display section 341
control the display of The sound lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction sound output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination part 27 in accordance with the display of the pattern display part 341 . For example, MPU
51 is a symbol display unit 341 when executing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect, which will be described later.
, image display, playback sound output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination part 27 are controlled.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs control signals from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52 . Commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 . Also, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6 . A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Also, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes a single control device having the functions of both the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

Also, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like, based on commands input from the main control device 4. Moreover, the operation switch 20a is connected to input-output I/F52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display section 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output presentation, a lamp presentation by the flickering mode of the illumination part 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4 .

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, changes the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination (see FIG. 32A), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 32 (B))), and production pattern type (Fig. 33 (A) ~
33(C)) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see step S23057 in the command determination process of FIG. 31),
The symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a failure, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the failure is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball payout performance suggestive image display process for displaying a ball payout performance suggestive image suggesting the ball payout performance on the sub-image display unit 38 .

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the pattern display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the sound lamp control device 5 . Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5 to execute the symbol variation display and effect display.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input/output I/F 62 and the like, and the input/output I/F 62 is connected to the sound lamp control device 5 and the pattern display section 341 . Two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 .

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes:
A ROM 611 and a RAM 612 are incorporated. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. MPU
61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as variable symbols such as main symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, notice effect images, ready-to-win effect images, jackpot effect images, and loss effect images. ing. The images displayed on the pattern display section 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 also stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the types of images to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbols. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and effect display.

A RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61 . In addition, RAM61
2 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payment control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. MPU
71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Also, the MPU 71 has an R
OM711 and RAM712 are incorporated.

A ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit from which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71 . Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7 . Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 includes the dispensing device 1
32 and a ball lending device 100 are connected.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not game balls are paid out, A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting a game ball to be put out is provided. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving section 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Also, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73 . The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball jamming (return to normal state) when a payout error such as ball jamming of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加And the ball lending device 100
is within the range of the amount stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10 It is possible to put out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of game balls are to be paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to release a predetermined number of game balls. be paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Also, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the amount of cash inserted.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32 .
Specifically, the shooting control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 while the shooting handle 22 is being rotated, thereby moving the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the shooting rail 321. feed above. The shooting control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the shooting handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball shooting mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation, thereby directing the game ball on the shooting rail 321 toward the game board 31. to fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a driving signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Also, the shooting handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and voltage is input to the shooting control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 22 . As a result, the shooting control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 22, increases the shooting intensity of the game ball from the game ball shooting mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 22 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes strong.

Further, the shooting handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop shooting the game ball. is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21
a and the ball stop switch 21b, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or detects that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player, The shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, preventing the game from being played in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 . In addition, the player can stop the shooting of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing while rotating the shooting handle 22.例文帳に追加

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply controller 9 generates a +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers, etc., a +5V voltage for logic used in the controller, and the like. The power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to its initial state. The game machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated with the RAM erase switch 91 turned on to turn on the power.

In addition, the power control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means charged with power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the game machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been cut off, the main control device 4,
A power failure signal is input to the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power failure state occurs when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge. In addition, when the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power failure signal from the power control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 26. FIG. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 includes a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed when a power failure occurs. Execute NMI interrupt processing and the like. Note that in the present embodiment, descriptions of start-up processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing of Main Controller 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the main timer interrupt processing procedure executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 . The main timer interrupt processing is, for example, 2 msec.
Executed every c. The main timer interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of sensors connected to the main controller 4 and the like. For example, the detection states of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, etc. are determined. At this time, MP
U41 stores the information in RAM412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball to any of the entering ball sensors 313a to 317a is detected. Further, when out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. do. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d reaches 60,000 balls and is cleared to 0 balls when the 60,000 ball base B1 was calculated last time (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 21). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 sets random number initial value counters CIN1, CIN
2 update. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses random number initial value counters CIN1, CIN
1 is added to the counter value in 2, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes start winning processing associated with winning to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes launch control processing (step S1005
). Details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the firing control process, the touch sensor 2 detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22 .
1a, and on the condition that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the shooting is not operated, the shooting of the game ball is enabled. Further, in the shooting control process, when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the shooting handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated, shooting of the game ball is disabled. It is a process to The MPU 41 instructs the shooting control device 8 to shoot the game ball when the shooting of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second prize winning opening 315 is to be in the electric role open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol is won when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and loses when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. We judge that it is. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and is lost when the normal winning random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. We judge that it is. Then, when the MPU 41 judges that the normal symbol winning is determined in the through gate process, the electric accessary 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second prize winning port 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 14 shows the MPU 4 at step S1004 in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG.
1 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a starting winning process executed by 1. FIG. Figure 1 below
4, the starting winning process will be described.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first winning port 314 has won a prize. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the first prize winning port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S110.
2, and when it is determined that there is no winning for the first winning hole 314 (step S110
1: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 16 and S1313), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412 .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 confirms the content of the success or failure information before the success or failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a determination target of the success or failure of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19) described later. A first pending command setting process for setting the first pending command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second prize winning port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize has been won for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that there is no prize for the second prize winning port 315 (step S1106: No ), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, the MPU
41, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the number of reservations M is 1
is added (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 13, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 in FIG. 16 and S1313), and stores the counter value in the first empty reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB in the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41, before the propriety information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a determination target of the propriety of the jackpot in the fluctuation start processing described later (S1408 in FIG. 17, FIG. 19), the propriety information The content is confirmed, and the second reserved command setting process is executed to set the second reserved command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second pending command setting process is the same as the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 15, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The second pending command setting process is performed by replacing the "first pending command" with the "second pending command" in the first pending command setting process of FIG.
The number N of reservations can be read as the number M of reservations.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 at step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. In addition, the first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or out), information such as the variation pattern and the number of pending N . The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 stores the pending number storage area N in the first pending storage area REA.
While reading the reservation number N from AA, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first reservation is read from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is the high probability mode. If the mode is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high probability mode (step S1202 : No), and the process goes to step S120
Go to 4. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 16) in the main processing described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag which is set to OFF when transitioning to another game state such as state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 stores a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7 (
B)) is read, and based on the high-probability mode propriety table, step S1201
Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out in is a value corresponding to jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode right/wrong table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success/failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to winning the jackpot is determined.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the success/failure determination is executed based on the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. However, in step S1203 or S1204, step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. 20 described later
After reading out the game setting values stored in , the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table corresponding to the game setting values may be selected one by one to determine success/failure.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to winning the jackpot (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, MPU41, from the RAM412 jackpot type counter C2
And the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read. For example, if the winning/failure information is stored in the third reservation storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 14, the jackpot type counter C2 and A counter value of the variation type counter CS1 is read. In addition, step S1 in the start winning process of FIG. 14 in the first reservation storage area RE1 to the fourth reservation storage area RE4
The pending area in which the success/failure information is stored in 104 can be determined by the value of the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NA.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number N contained in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first reservation storage area RE1 to the fourth reservation storage area RE4 corresponds to the right/fail information stored in the first reservation command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command (
step S1209).

Note that the first pending command that is set to ON in the first pending command setting process is the RAM
412, and is erased after being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with other commands in step S1301 of the main processing of FIG. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the sound lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 . In the main process, main control processes for progress of the variation game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1310 are executed as regular processes, for example, in a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processes of steps S1311 to S1313 are executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next cycle. be.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt processing of FIG.
32 or the peripheral control unit 140. For example, in the RAM 412 commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command If so, it sends that command to the audio lamp controller 5 . Also,
RAM4
When a prize ball command is set in 12, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7. - 特許庁

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 controls the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332
A prize ball command to be output to is set in RAM412. Concretely, MPU41, RAM4
Based on the winning detection information stored in 12, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. - 特許庁At this time, the MPU
41, in the normal game state (low-probability mode and not high-frequency support mode),
When the general winning port 313 or the first winning port 314 wins, the number of general winning port payout balls or the number of first winning port payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is
It is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out by winning this time. In addition, the MPU 41 is in the second winning port 315 in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) When a prize has been won, the number of balls to be paid out from the second winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is won in the variable winning port 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls to be paid out from the variable winning port stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls to be paid out due to the current winning. is added to the value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, MPU41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variation pattern command required for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. be done. At this time, the MPU41, the big hit random number counter C updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG.
1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and step S1 of this process
302 and based on each value of the variation type counter CS1 updated in step S1313,
A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the open/close door 316b for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game (jackpot type ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot types are the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot. Also, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open/close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start processing of FIG. 19 described later. In the game state transition process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the MPU 41 changes the game state to a jackpot game state in which the open/close execution mode is executed, a probability variable game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high Shift to a short-time game state which is a frequency support mode, a normal game state which is not a high-frequency support mode in a low-probability mode, or the like.

For example, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the jackpot game state after the variable game for notifying the lottery result ends. At this time,
The MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. In addition, when the big win game is finished, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big win game state to a predetermined game state according to the lottery result of the big win lottery that triggered the execution of the big win game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable game state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, after the end of the jackpot game, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the prescribed number of times is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variation game.

Further, when the transition of the game state is caused, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the game state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the game state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high probability mode flag to ON while setting the jackpot game flag to OFF when there is a transition of the game state from the jackpot game state to the probability variation game state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the game state from the variable probability game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot game flag is set to ON.

Further, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "jackpot count" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.例文帳に追加

<Step S1307>
In step S<b>1307 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the main display section 37 . By this display control processing, the 7-segment displays 372 and 37 in the main display section 37
At 3, the pattern variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command,
The pattern variation display is stopped and displayed with the pattern indicating the result of the lottery. In addition, by the display control processing, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, and the presence or absence of normal symbol winning is indicated by turning on and off the pair of LED lamps. is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of Incidentally, in the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b associated with the second winning opening 315 is opened only for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes game set value change processing. In this game set value change process, a process of controlling the display or non-display of the game set value or the change of the game set value stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation of the set value change operation section 46 is executed. be. Details of the game set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the game ball is started to be launched. A limited execution is also conceivable. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game set value cannot be changed until the power is turned on next time.
To prevent game set values from being changed during business hours of a game hall.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing in the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the continuous role ratio, and the role ratio are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

<Step S1310>
In step S<b>1310 , the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43 . In the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43, processing for displaying the base information updated in step S1309 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that the performance display monitor 43
The details of the display control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26. FIG.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1311: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1311: Yes), steps S1311, S1312 and S1313 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1312>
At step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. After updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1311.

[Variation game control process]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 17,
Variation game control processing will be explained.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the middle of a jackpot game.
s), when the variation game control process is terminated and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S140
1: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of the execution of the jackpot game is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot game state in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag set to .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. Step S14 of the variation game control process
The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to OFF in 05.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display.
Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404, and when it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display the symbols corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( Step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 is the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the pending storage area 412b, the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB It is determined whether both are 0 (step S140
6). Here, the MPU 41, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S
1406: Yes), end the variation game control process. On the other hand, the MPU 41 has the number of reservations N
and the pending number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the process proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the win/fail information data stored in the reservation storage area 412b. The MPU 41 performs step S1407.
, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 causes the pattern display section 34 to display a variable display based on the winning/failing information.
1 is executed, and the variation game control process is terminated. In addition,
Details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of data setting processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S150
1: Yes), the process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, MPU41 transfers a process to step S1505, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the pending number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA (step S1502), from the first pending area REA1 to the execution area AE The pass/fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, and the third reservation area RE
The success/failure information of A3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the success/failure information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved to the third reservation area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves when the pending number M is 0 (step S1501:
No), step S1501 moves to when both or one of the number M of reservations and the number N of reservations is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. 17 (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N to 0
Since it can be determined that it is not, the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 is executed.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the right/fail information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 moves from the second reservation area REB2 to
The success/failure information in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The success/failure information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. M.
PU41 shifts a process to step S1508, when the process of step S1507 is complete|finished.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, MPU41, the first reservation area REA1 ~ fourth reservation area R
A shift command is set in the RAM 412 to indicate that the validity information of the EA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. FIG. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 19,
The fluctuation start processing will be explained.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the game state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to ON in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 16, is set to ON. . When the game state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602, and when the game state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the game state is the low probability mode. If so, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
At step S1602, the MPU 41 stores a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7 (
B) Based on), judgment whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of the reservation storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. I do. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41
Based on the low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 20 described later, the reservation storage area 41
Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit/fail information stored in the execution area AE of 2b is a value corresponding to winning a jackpot is determined.

In steps S1602 and S1603, success/failure determination is executed based on a high-probability mode success/failure table or a low-probability mode success/failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG.
After reading out the game setting values stored in , the high-probability mode success/failure table or the low-probability mode success/failure table corresponding to the game setting values may be selected one by one to determine success/failure.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display section 37 corresponding to the variable game variation pattern to the variable display time counter. Specifically, MPU41, when the result of the success or failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8A) Identify. Also, the MPU 41
If the result of the success or failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variable jackpot,
A variation pattern is specified based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variable jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8(B)). Furthermore, when the result of the success/failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is an error, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the error variation table (see FIG. 8(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sends a variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 to R
Set to AM412. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 5, and the audio ramp control device 5 displays the pattern based on the variation pattern command. Part 341
Executes symbol variation display etc.

In addition, as described above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 adds "A" to the variation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that the 5R normal jackpot is "A01".
” to “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, MPU41, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern "01" ~
Any one of "B01" to "B03", which is "03" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot, is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, the MPU 41
If the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", 16 in the variation pattern "01" to "03"
Any one of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that it is an R probability variable jackpot is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "loss", the MPU 41 selects one of the variation patterns "D01" to "D08" with "D" indicating failure to the variation patterns "01" to "08". It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes in the variation pattern command information as to whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach, or a complete loss.

<Step S1606>
At step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 37, and terminates the variation start process. When starting the variable display of symbols on the main display section 37, the MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to ON. This variable display flag is shown in FIG.
In step S1402 in the variation game process of No. 7, it is referenced to determine whether or not the main display unit 37 is in the process of symbol variation display. In addition, the MPU 41 displays the main display section 37
game information storage area 412 set in RAM 412
1 is added to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in d. Furthermore, if the result of the success/failure determination based on the low-probability mode success/failure table in step S1603 is out,
1 is added to the "number of consecutive losses" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared to 0 when the result is a big win.

[Game setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game set value change process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game set value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress, and if the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game set value change processing ends. However, if the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No)
, the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If it is not during the symbol variation display (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting When the value change process is terminated and the jackpot game state is not set (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703.
For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state is in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, It is determined whether or not an operation to turn on the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been made to the set value change operation unit 46 . That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. do not have. Here, when the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704, and the power of the game set value display unit 45 is turned on from off. (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S170
3: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (step S1704), and displays the number indicating the read game setting value on the game setting value display section 45. display (step S1705). Thereby, the current game set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the set value display flag indicating that the game set value is being displayed on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the game set value change processing.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the game set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S
1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the game setting value is being displayed in the game setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708, and if the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). That is, if the game set value display unit 45 is not turned on and the power is not turned on, the game set value change process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
If the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), M
The PU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S
1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game set value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1
708: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1709, and if the setting value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), the process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), M
The PU 41 executes processing for changing the display on the game set value display section 45 (step S17
09). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before rotation. Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before rotation is displayed.

When the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 before rotation is "4" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, the game set value display section 45 displays The displayed number is changed to "1", and the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 before rotation is changed to "
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle in the case of "1", the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is changed to "4". Further, when the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is "4", the player is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the game set value display section 45 is "1". In some cases, no more leftward rotations may be allowed.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting values in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the numbers displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting values.
The game set value change process is ended. As a result, when the power of the set value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game set values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the RAM 412 as valid game set values. Game information storage area 412
d. Therefore, by rotating the set value change operation unit 46 to change the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the game set values stored in the RAM 412 are changed. By turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45, the game set value can be determined.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No)
, the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (
Step S1711), that is, it is determined whether or not an operation to turn off the game set value display section 45 is performed on the set value change operation section 46 or not. When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game set value change process is terminated. In addition,
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711
: Yes), in the game set value display section 45, the digits indicating the game set value are extinguished by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment display, and the game set value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S171
1: Yes), the MPU 41 creates a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7A) according to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710.
and select the high-probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 7B) and store it in the RAM 412 (
step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value displaying flag to OFF, and terminates the game setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(A)) and a high-probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 7(B)) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 are displayed. ) is selected. That is, since the win/fail table with the same game set value is selected for the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, it is easy to change the game set value. However, the game set value in the low probability mode and the game set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the game setting value of the low probability mode is set to "1", and the game setting value of the high probability mode is set to "4". It becomes possible to set it as a setting value.

[Performance information update process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 16 . FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 . The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads the number of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further reads out the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. read out (step S18
02). Here, the number of various payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc., and the number of payout balls from the general winning opening, the number of paying out balls from the first winning opening, the number of paying out balls from the second winning opening, and the number of paying out balls from the variable winning opening. number applies. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read out number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening, the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning opening, and the number of out balls,
12d is overwritten and updated to the current base BL of the base information stored in 12d (step S1803
) (see FIG. 22(A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100×(the number of balls paid out to the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out to the first winning opening)/the number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery count (cumulative fluctuation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S
1805). The number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is calculated as the number of symbol variation display times (number of jackpot lottery receptions) on the 7-segment display 372 until the number of minus difference balls becomes 250 balls in the normal game state. Specifically, the unit jackpot lottery count = “accumulated jackpot lottery count” / ((“number of out balls” - “number of balls paid out to general winning opening” - “number of balls paid out to first winning opening”) / 250 balls) be done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is calculated as the accumulated unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
At step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out at step S1802 has reached 60000 balls. , and if the number of out balls has not reached 60000 (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls has reached 60000 (step S1806: Yes), MPU
41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base two times before in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls and the number of out balls to 0 in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1810).
), and the specific performance information update process ends.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
23 to 26 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG. Figure 2 below
3 to 26, the display control processing of the performance display monitor 43 will be described.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is the performance display monitor 4
3 is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed in step S
1906 or step S1930 in FIG. 26 to turn it on. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 24, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No ), and the process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU
41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S190).
2). Here, the B1 display flag is the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43
is displayed, and is set to ON in step S1912 in FIG. 24, which will be described later. When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S
1902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1918 in FIG. 25, and if the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU
41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S190).
3). Here, the B2 display flag is the 60,000 ball base B the last time on the performance display monitor 43.
2 is displayed, and is set to ON in step S1921 in FIG. 25, which will be described later. If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 in FIG. 26, and if the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No ), and the process goes to step S1904.
transition to

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU
41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Y
es), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1905).
). For example, the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is shown in FIG.
In the example shown in 2(A), "8.", "
Four 7-segment displays 431 of which "L", "2", and "9" constitute the performance display monitor 43
434, and if the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22(B), the current base BL
"8.", "L", "0", and "0" indicating that the fuel consumption is 0% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 is B
The L display flag is set to ON (step S1906), and the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time is set (step S190).
7) End the display control process.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), FIG.
4, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. It judges (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1.
910, if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S190
9: No), the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1910), and the RAM 412
The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d
is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "1", "2" and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431-434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. FIG. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), M
The PU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from ON to OFF (
step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and the performance display switch 44
4 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the 7-segment display 431
434, the letters and numbers indicating the current base BL are extinguished.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915),
The value of the display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1916), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), FIG.
5, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set at step S1913 in FIG. It judges (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1.
919, if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S191
8: No), the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and the RAM 412
60,000 ball base B
2 is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. , 3, 2
is displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1921) (step S1921).
1922), the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), M
The PU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from ON to OFF (
step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and the performance display switch 4
4 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the display control process is terminated. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the 7-segment display 431
By cutting off the power to 434, the letters and numbers indicating the previous 60,000 ball base B1 are extinguished.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924),
The value of the display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1925), and the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), FIG.
6, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. It judges (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1.
928, if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S192
7: No), the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes),
The MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the RAM 412
The current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 22B, the current base BL is 0%. "8.", "
L", "0", and "0" constitute the performance display monitor 43 with four 7-segment indicators 431
~434. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), and sets the current base BL to the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time.
An L display time counter is set (step S1931), and the display control process ends.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), M
The PU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from ON to OFF (
step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and the performance display switch 4
4 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the display control process is terminated. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the 7-segment display 431
By cutting off the power supply to ~434, the letters and numbers indicating the 60,000 ball base B2 before the last one are extinguished.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: Y
es), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933),
The value of the display time counter is cleared to 0 (step S1934), and the display control process ends.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 51. FIG.

It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 . In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing when starting up the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, and the like. Description of these processes is omitted.

[Secondary Timer Interrupt Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG. The MPU 51 executes, for example, sub timer interrupt processing as regular processing with a period of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the secondary timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 performs operation detection processing (step S2001), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2002), counter update processing (step S2003), command determination processing (step S2004). , variation game effect processing (step S2005), and jackpot game effect processing (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
Here, FIG. 28 shows the operation detection process (step S20) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.
01) is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the operation history for the past three times is sequentially updated. In the gaming machine 10, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 20 is detected at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt processing by the operation detection processing being executed by the MPU 51. will be judged.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. Also, in step S2102,
The MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. After that, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third operation detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2101 to S2103, as the operation history of the operation button 20, the most recent three operation states at 1 msec intervals are set to the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection flag. It is stored in RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the operation state immediately before is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the operation state two times before is stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation Detection Pattern Judgment Processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. set a flag. The operation pattern flags are composed of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 is continued. Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has been started. Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation of the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 selects the operation button 2 three times before.
It is determined whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of 0 is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is ON (step S2201: Yes
), the process proceeds to step S2202, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S
When the process moves to 2203 and the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No)
, the process proceeds to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 sets the third
It is determined whether or not the operation detection flag is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 uses the third
If the operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2.
204, when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No),
Processing proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the operation state of the operation button 20 three times to "ON".
, "on", and "on", it can be determined that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing, so the first operation pattern flag is set to on, the second operation pattern flag and The third operation pattern flag is set to OFF (see FIG. 30). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 continues.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines that the first operation detection flag is off in step S2201 (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. is determined (step S2205). where MPU5
1, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2206, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205
: No), the process proceeds to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets the third
It is determined whether or not the operation detection flag is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No), the process is continued. The process moves to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the operation state of the operation button 20 three times to "OFF".
, “on”, and “on”, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (the operation has started), so the second operation pattern flag is turned on. and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF (see FIG. 30). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operating state to the operating state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing unintended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines that the second operation detection flag is off in step S2202 (step S2202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (step S2208). Here, MPU51
If the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2210, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208:
No), the process proceeds to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 sets the operation state of the operation button 20 three times to "ON".
, "off", and "off", it can be determined that the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (the operation has ended), so the third operation pattern flag is set to on. and set the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF (
See Figure 30). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). In this way, using the third operation pattern flag, the operation button 20
has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, the operating state of the operating button 20 for three times is reflected. The detection is prevented, and the completion of the operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at the timing unintended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and terminates the detected operation pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "off", "off", and "off", occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 30). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operating state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update process]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 27, in the counter update process (step S2003), the MPU
51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the performance pattern type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is the main control device 4
It is used to determine the type of main symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Also, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4 . For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-109. On the other hand, M
PU51 subtracts 1 from the variation display counter. This variable display counter is displayed in the pattern display section 34
It is for counting the variable display time of 1, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, the fact that variation is in progress, the end of the variation display of the pattern display section 341, and the like. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type suggesting the game setting value. For example, the character type counter is 0 to 11
A loop counter that loops between four. The MPU 51 also adds 1 to the counter value of the character mode type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character mode type counter updated here is used to determine the character mode type that suggests the number of unit jackpot lotteries. For example, the character mode type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-119. Also, the MPU
51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening rank suggesting effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggesting image type suggesting the rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery times executed together with the basic effect at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening rank suggestive image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-104. Also, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type in the ending of the jackpot game. For example, the ending basic effect type counter is 0 to 109
is a loop counter that loops between Also, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the ending rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending rank suggesting performance type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggesting image type suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery frequency executed together with the basic performance in the ending of the jackpot game. for example,
The ending rank suggestive image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-74. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening/closing execution mode production scenario type updated here is used to determine the production scenario type in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-79. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the round game character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-49. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the round game rank suggestive image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game rank suggesting effect type counter updated here is used to determine the rank suggesting image type suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery frequency executed together with the round game effect of the big win game. For example, the round game rank suggestive image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-89.

[Command judgment processing]
In command determination processing (step S2004), a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, MPU51
If no command has been received (step S2301: No), the command determination process is terminated. Commands received from main controller 4 are stored in the unprocessed command storage area of RAM 512, and MPU 51 refers to the unprocessed command storage area to determine whether or not a command has been received. Note that the commands stored in the unprocessed command storage area are deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2301 and is subject to processing. remembered.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2302: No), the process proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbols and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command and the ROM 511 in advance.
First stop symbol selection table stored in (see FIG. 32 (A)), variation type table (
32 (B)) and effect type table (see FIGS. 33 (A) to 33 (C)), RA
A variation pattern is determined based on the value of the effect type counter stored in M512.
Moreover, MPU51 sets the big-hit flag according to a big-hit classification to ON, when the information regarding a big-hit classification is contained in a variation pattern command. Specifically, the MPU51
sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R variable variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to the 16R variable variable jackpot. In this case, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of the main symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is the main symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The production type table includes a normal reach production pattern table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 33A), a super reach production pattern table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 33B), and a special reach production corresponding to special reach. A pattern table (see FIG. 33(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 32(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. Figure 32 (
As shown in A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 32 (A) shows that the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a combination of symbols indicating that the probability variation jackpot (either the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot), “777 ” is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the double eyes other than “333” and “777” are either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbols, and the first stop symbols are selected with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot or the 16R probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot
symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot"
Even in the case of , it is possible to stop display the symbol combination of the second number other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot. That is, the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot"
Even in the case of , double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333", in which the stop display result of the main symbols suggests a 5R normal jackpot, can be stop-displayed. And the lottery result is "
In the case of "5R probability variable jackpot", when the main pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop pattern, the MPU 51 performs a 5R probability variable promotion effect that clearly indicates that the jackpot game is a 5R probability variable jackpot. to run.

Furthermore, when the lottery result is "16 probability variable jackpot", there is a distribution for all the main patterns of "1" to "9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main patterns of "1" to "9" Design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", double symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stop-displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the stop display result of the main symbol is a symbol combination other than "777" which suggests 5R probability variable jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. can be When the lottery result is ``16R probability variable big win'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes 16R promotion presentation for indicating 16R probability variable big win in the jackpot game.

Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot,
The second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination to be stop-displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "out", all the main symbols "1" to "9" are sorted, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "losing", the losing type selected based on the losing type table (FIG. 7(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the outlier type is front and rear outreach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the out-of-order type is a ready-to-win other than front-to-rear out-of-order, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the above-mentioned loss type is complete loss, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The combination of main symbols and stop symbols may be determined by the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbols are determined by the sound ramp control device 5, and the second stop symbols and the final stop symbols are determined by the display control device 6. may decide.

Also, FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 32B, the variation type table defines the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" with a lottery result of "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern of "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30 s" and a variation type of "normal ready-to-win effect pattern". Also,
A variation pattern command "B02" with a lottery result of "5R probability variable jackpot" and a variation pattern of "02" is associated with a variation display time of "60 s" and a variation type of "super ready-to-win production pattern". The result is "16R probability variable jackpot" and the variation pattern is "
03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special ready-to-win effect pattern”. In addition, the lottery result is "out"
and the variation pattern command “D04” with the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”, and the lottery result is “
A variation pattern command "D05" having "out" and a variation pattern of "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10 s" and a variation type of "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 33(A) to 33(C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type table. The production pattern type table is set for each variation type (production pattern).
Specifically, FIG. 33(A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG.
) is a super reach effect pattern table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect, and FIG. It is a special reach effect pattern table that is referred to in certain cases.

In the present embodiment, a case in which there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example, but the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 33, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach production pattern type table shown in FIG. 33 (A), according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss), as the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter "Production pattern X1" ~
"Production pattern X5" is defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal ready-to-win effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the normal ready-to-win effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. do. Here, the production patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal ready-to-win production pattern type table are productions in which, for example, a normal ready-to-win production is executed in which the main symbol is in a ready-to-win state after the high-speed fluctuation production in which the main symbol changes at high speed, This is an effect in which the final individual effect type is a normal reach effect.

In addition, in the super ready-to-win effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33(B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. there is Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super ready-to-win effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the super ready-to-win effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Y1 to production pattern Y3 included in the super ready-to-win production pattern table, for example, the normal ready-to-win production is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and the final individual production type is higher than the normal ready-to-win production, This is a production that develops into a super reach production with a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the super ready-to-win effect pattern table may include a super ready-to-win effect pattern effect that develops into the super ready-to-win effect after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed without going through the normal ready-to-win effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33(C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the result of the lottery. there is Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special ready-to-win effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the special ready-to-win effect pattern table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern Z1 to production pattern Z3 included in the special reach production pattern table, for example, normal reach production and super reach production are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production, and normal reach production and super reach production are performed as the final individual production type. It is a production that develops into a special reach production with a higher expectation of a big hit than normal reach production and a longer production execution time than normal reach production. In addition, the special reach production pattern table may include a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without going through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. good.

Then, the MPU 51 stores the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the display variation pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type table and the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type) in the RAM 512. set.

<Step S2304>
Returning to the description of FIG. 31, in step S2304, the MPU 51 executes a ball-putting-performance-indicative-image display process for causing the sub-image display unit 38 to display a ball-putting-performance-indicating image suggesting the ball-putting-out performance. In the ball payout performance suggestive image display process, a sub-image display unit 38 displays a ball payout performance suggestive image in which a character selected according to a game setting value is selected according to the unit jackpot lottery number of times when a specific condition is satisfied. to display. Details of the ball-out performance suggesting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command to the variation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by one in the counter updating process (step S2003) of FIG. It is possible to judge For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display is finished when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols in the symbol display section 341, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the content of the ball output performance suggestive image. and terminate the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined in step S2303, the variation type (effect pattern type), and the payout performance suggestive image. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores the variation image of the main symbol and the effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and effect display in the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses,
Variations of a plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the main pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like. . On the other hand, in the sub-image display section 38, a ball output suggestive image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 sets the jackpot game execution flag to ON at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, the MPU 51
If the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2307: Yes
), the process proceeds to step S2308, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2307: No), the process proceeds to step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes jackpot game effect determination processing (step S2308). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining the effect to be executed in the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that each round game is started in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and what round the round game is, and the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 is set in Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2310: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2311, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2310: No), the process to step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S26
04). Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the round game to be started in the RAM 512 as the number of rounds information based on the number of rounds information indicating what round the round game is included in the round game start command (step S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command for starting the ending of the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 . Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2313: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2314, and if the received command is not the ending start command (step S2312: N
o), the process moves to step S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2609).
).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2315: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2316, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2315: No), the process the step S
2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. (step S
2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game set value change command. The game set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the game set value change process of FIG. be done. Here, the MPU 51, if the received command is a game set value change command (step S2317: Yes),
The process proceeds to step S2318, and when the received command is not the game set value change command (step S2317: No), the process proceeds to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command and stores the changed game setting value. In addition, RA
The game set values stored in M512 are read at step S2404 in the ball output suggestive image display process of FIG. 34, which will be described later, and are referred to for selecting the character type suggesting the game set values.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a unit jackpot lottery count update command. The unit jackpot lottery count update command is a command to update the first winning port 314 for a certain number of minus difference balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode). It is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the number of times the pattern variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery has been received) triggered by the winning, and the specific performance information of FIG. It is updated in step S1805 in the update process. Here, MPU51
, when the received command is a unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S23
19: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2320, and if the received command is not a unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S2319: No), the process proceeds to step S23
21.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the RAM 512 to the unit jackpot lottery count included in the unit jackpot lottery count update command. The number of unit jackpot lotteries stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2407 in the image display process suggesting ball output performance shown in FIG. Referred to for

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main controller 4, and then terminates the command determination processing.

[Image display processing suggesting ball output performance]
In the ball payout performance suggestive image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process of FIG. is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 as an image suggesting ball output performance in the character mode selected by pressing. In this embodiment, the specific condition for displaying the ball payout performance display image in the variable gaming state is that the jackpot lottery (variable game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). Other conditions may be used as the specific conditions, and the details thereof will be described as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times are used to display the ball-out performance suggestion image. Continuous role product ratio information, role product ratio information, etc.) may be used to display the ball payout performance suggestive image. Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the ball output suggestive image display process. Hereinafter, an example of the procedure of the ball output suggestive image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34 .

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot lottery counter set to 1000 in step S2403 described later (step S2401), and checks whether the value of the jackpot lottery counter after the subtraction is 0. It judges (step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000 times. MPU5
1 is when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes)
, the process proceeds to step S2403, and when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No), the process proceeds to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
If the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), M
PU51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting values stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects the character type according to the game setting values (step S2405). That is, in the variable gaming state in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is notified, the number of jackpot lotteries (number of variable games) is 1
With reaching 000 times as a specific condition, a ball output suggestive image is displayed. It should be noted that the specific condition for displaying the performance suggestion image in the variable game is not limited to the number of times of jackpot lottery (number of times of variable game) reaching 1000 times, and may be other conditions. For example, the number of jackpot lotteries (number of variable games) reaches a predetermined number other than 1000, the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are consecutively out of a predetermined number of times,
It is also conceivable to set the execution of a specific performance as a variable game performance as a specific condition, to draw a lottery as to whether or not to display a ball payout performance suggestion image, and to win the lottery.

Here, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of game set value suggesting character types that suggest game set values. FIG. 36 is an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggesting character.

As shown in FIG. 35, game set value suggested character types include a male character (hereinafter "Sam"), a female character A (hereinafter "Marine"), a female character B (hereinafter "Warin").
), Female Character C (hereinafter “Urin”), Marine Life Character A (hereinafter “Dugong”)
and marine life character B (hereinafter "shark"). "Sam" is a character that suggests that the game set value is four. "Marine" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 3. "Warin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 2. "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 1. "Dugong" is a character that suggests that the game set value is an even number (2 or 4). "Shark" is a character that suggests that the game set value is an odd number (1 or 3). On this point:
This is clear from the game set value suggestion character selection table shown in FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggested character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Dugong".
Other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. If the game setting value is 3, "
"Marine" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Shark", and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game set value is 2, "Warin" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Dugong", and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game set value is 1, "Urin" is most likely to be selected, followed by "Shark", and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.

Thus, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character suggesting that the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is selected when the game setting value is 3. "Warin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2 and suggests that the game setting value is 2. "Urin" is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. Also, "Dugong" is more likely to be selected when the game setting value is 2 or 4 than when the game setting value is 1 or 3, suggesting that the game setting value is 2 or 4 (an even number). It has become a character. In addition, "shark" has a game setting value of 1
or 3, the character is more likely to be selected than when the game set value is 2 or 4, suggesting that the game set value is 1 or 3 (odd number).

<Step S2406>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 determines whether the selected game setting value suggesting character is "Dugong" or "Shark" (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether or not the selected game set value suggesting characters are male characters and female characters A to C. When the game set value suggesting character is "dugong" or "shark" (step S2
406: Yes), the process moves to step S2409, and the game setting value suggesting character is "
If it is not "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2.
Go to 407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
If the game set value suggesting character is not "dugong" or "shark" (step S240
6: No), the MPU 51 acquires the number of unit jackpot lotteries stored in the RAM 512 (step S2407), and selects the mode type of the game set value suggesting character according to the number of unit jackpot lotteries (rank) (step S2407). S2408). That is, when the game setting value suggesting character is other than "Dugong" and "Shark", the unit jackpot lottery frequency (rank) is suggested according to the aspect of the game setting value suggesting character. Incidentally, even when the game setting value suggesting characters are "Dugong" and "Shark", the number of unit jackpot lotteries (rank) may be suggested according to the aspect of the game setting value suggesting character.

Here, FIGS. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing an example of the character mode selection table for selecting the mode of the game set value suggesting character. The character mode selection table is defined for each rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries. In this embodiment, the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 25
If it is more than once, "Rank S", if the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 20 or more and less than 25 times, "
Rank A", "Rank B" if the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 15 or more and less than 20 times, "Rank C" if the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 10 or more and less than 15 times, or 10 unit jackpot lotteries If it is less than that, it is classified as "Rank D", and a character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

In each character mode selection table, a character mode is defined for each game setting value suggesting character, and the mode of suggesting a rank differs depending on the game setting value suggesting character type. For example, in the case of "Sam", the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is suggested according to the body shape. Specifically, it is "rank S" for being a super macho figure, "rank A" for being a macho figure (see FIG. 35), and "rank A" for being a thin macho figure
Being "rank B", being "rank B" by having a gari figure, skinny figure (
(see FIG. 39(A)) indicates that it is "rank C".

In addition, in the case of "Marine", the rank of the unit jackpot lottery frequency is suggested by the costume. Specifically, "rank S" because the costume is a kimono, "rank A" because the costume is Santa, "rank B" because the costume is a happi coat, A bikini (see FIG. 35) as the costume suggests "rank B", and a tank top as the costume suggests "rank C".

In addition, in the case of "Warin" and "Urin", the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is suggested by posture, pose, and the like. In the case of "warin", it is suggested that the wink, finger whistle, triangular sitting (see FIG. 35), standing posture and looking down posture are ranked higher in this order. In the case of "Urin", it is suggested that the V sign, guts pose, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign and bye-bye are ranked in the order of highest.

As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the unit jackpot lottery number of times is "rank S" (the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 25 or more), the super macho body shape is most likely to be selected for "Sam", while other body shapes are For ``marine,'' the kimono costume is the most likely to be chosen, while other costumes are the most difficult to choose. , the V sign is most likely to be selected, while the other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has a super macho figure, "Marine" has a kimono, "Warin" has a wink, and "Urin" has a V sign. , suggests that the unit jackpot lottery number of times is “rank S”.

As shown in FIG. 37(B), when the unit jackpot lottery number of times is "rank A" (the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 20 or more and less than 25 times), the macho figure is most likely to be selected in "Sam" while other Body shape is difficult to select, Santa costume is the most likely to be selected in "Marine", but other costumes are difficult to be selected, and finger whistling is the most likely to be selected in "Warin", but other postures and poses are difficult to be selected. , and “Urin”, the guts pose is most likely to be selected, while the other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has a macho figure, "Marine" has a Santa costume, "Warin" has a whistling pose, and "Urin" has a guts pose. , suggesting that the unit jackpot lottery frequency is "rank A".

As shown in FIG. 37 (C), when the unit jackpot lottery number of times is "rank B" (the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 15 or more and less than 20 times), the thin macho body shape is most likely to be selected for "Sam" while other For "marine", the happi costume is the most likely to be selected, but other costumes are the most likely to be selected. In "Urin", the OK sign is most likely to be selected, while other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has a slender macho body, "Marine" has a happy costume, "Warin" has a triangle sitting, and "Urin" has an O.
The pose of the K sign suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B".

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C" (the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 10 times or more and less than 15 times), the body shape is most likely to be selected for "Sam", while other Body shape is difficult to select. For “marine”, bikini outfit is most likely to be selected, but other outfits are difficult to be selected. , and “Urin”, the good sign is most likely to be selected, while the other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, in "Sam", by having a gauzy figure, in "Marin", by wearing a bikini, in "Warin", by being upright, in "Urin", by giving a good sign. It suggests that the number of jackpot lotteries is "rank C".

As shown in FIG. 38(B), when the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank D” (the unit jackpot lottery count is less than 10 times), the skinny body shape is most likely to be selected for “Sam”, while other body shapes are selected. In "Marine", the tank top costume is the most likely to be selected, but other costumes are difficult to be selected. In "Urin", bye-bye is most likely to be selected, while other poses are less likely to be selected. In other words, "Sam" has a skinny figure, "Marine" has a tank top, "Warin" has a downward posture, and "Urin" has a good-bye pose. This suggests that the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank D”.

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 causes the sub-image display unit 38 to display a ball-out performance suggestive image (step S2409). Specifically, when the game setting value suggesting character selected in step S2405 is other than "dugong" or "shark" (step S2406:
No), the game setting value suggesting character selected in step S2405 is displayed on the sub-image display section 38 as the ball output suggesting image in the manner selected in step S2408.
On the other hand, the game set value suggestion character selected in step S2405 is "Dugong" or "
shark" (step S2406: Yes), the image shown in FIG.
"Dugong" or "Shark" is displayed on the sub-image display section 38 in the manner shown in FIG. and M.
The PU 51 sets on the suggestive image displaying flag indicating that the ball-putting performance suggestive image is being displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 (step S2410), and ends the ball-putting performance suggestive image display processing.

Here, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a payout performance suggestion image in a variation game. FIG. 39(A)
In the ball output performance suggesting image shown in FIG. 2, a skinny figure "Sam" is displayed, suggesting that the game setting value is 4 and the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank D". Also, FIG. 39 (
In B), the ball output performance suggestive image shows "Urin" in the pose of the OK sign.
It is suggested that the game set value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank C”.

In this embodiment, a ball payout performance suggestive image that suggests the ball payout performance can be displayed in a variable game, so that the player can confirm the ball payout performance suggestive image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. The player can concentrate on the game, and enjoy guessing the ball payout performance from the image indicating the ball payout performance displayed on the sub-image display section 38.例文帳に追加As a result, the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball output suggesting image is displayed as suggesting the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times. Here, the game set value defines the probability (jackpot probability) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the jackpot probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. In addition, the number of unit jackpots is the first prize until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls (for example, minus 250 balls) or the number of shot balls (number of out balls) of the game ball reaches the specified number of balls. It is the number of times the transition determination is performed with the entry of the game ball into the mouth 314 as a trigger. In other words, the number of unit jackpot lotteries is an index that indicates the ease of receiving the jackpot lottery in the normal game state (state that is not in the low-probability mode and the time-saving mode), and the game balls that are required until the jackpot lottery result becomes a jackpot. Affects the number (difference ball in normal game state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on multiple pieces of performance information including the number of unit jackpot lotteries, it is possible to make an evaluation that reflects the ball difference in the normal game state. It becomes possible to suggest the performance of putting out balls based on a more appropriately reflected index.

Instead of one or both of the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times, the ball output performance may be suggested based on the base, the continuous accessory ratio, or the accessory ratio.

Here, the base is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low-probability mode, not high-frequency support mode) as described above. It is the ratio of the total number of payout balls between the "general winning opening payout ball number" and the "first winning opening payout ball number". Therefore, by suggesting the ball output performance based on the base, it affects the number of game balls required until the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the normal game state becomes a big win (different balls in the normal game state). . Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on a plurality of pieces of performance information including the base, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10. Become.

In addition, as described above, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of winnings to all the winning holes that pay out prize balls (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316). This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the variable winning opening to the number of payout balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is
It is an index showing the frequency of the lottery result of the big win lottery becoming a big win (remaining ratio in the big win game state) and the ease of winning the variable winning port 316 (ball output rate in the big win game state).
Therefore, by evaluating the ball output performance based on multiple performance information including the continuous role ratio,
Since the ball payout performance in the jackpot game state is reflected, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance more appropriately.

In addition, the role ratio is based on all the winning openings that have prize balls paid out (general winning opening 31
3. In the total number of balls paid out by winning to the first winning port 314, second winning port 315 and variable winning port 316), the total number of paid out balls of the second winning port and the number of variable winning ports is ratio. That is, the role ratio is the frequency that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (stay ratio of the jackpot game state), the stay ratio of the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and the variable winning port 316 and It is an index that indicates the ease of winning a prize to the second prize winning port 315 (percentage of winning balls in a jackpot game state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on multiple performance information including the role ratio, the ball payout performance in the jackpot game state and the time saving game state is reflected, so the ball payout performance is more appropriately suggested. it becomes possible to

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned ball payout performance (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio or role ratio), or instead of one of these ball payout performances, the ball payout performance You may make it suggest a ball expected value. Here, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of output balls (discharge game balls number). Expected ball output is the total number of game balls launched (total number of out balls)
100% when the expected number of paid out balls (number of paid out game balls) is the same as the expected number of paid out balls (number of paid out game balls) is greater than 100% when the expected It becomes less than 100% when the number of paid balls (the number of paid-out game balls) is smaller. That is, when the expected ball output value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the value is, the higher the ball output performance is. On the other hand, when the expected value of payout is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the expected value, the lower the payout performance.

In addition, the expected number of balls paid out (number of game balls paid out) is normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the theoretical ratio of the jackpot gaming state,
It can be calculated from the theoretical number of balls in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is
For example, game setting value (jackpot probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), distribution rate of jackpot type (see FIG. 7C), unit jackpot lottery It is calculated based on the number of times, the role ratio, etc. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (the number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of game balls paid out) other than the normal game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the allocation rate of the jackpot type (Fig. 7 (C
)), calculated based on the number of theoretical difference balls, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc. for each jackpot type.

Also, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. here,
The borderline is a unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to make the expected ball output value 100%
This is the number of jackpot lotteries required for a winning ball rental, and this borderline is calculated on the assumption that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a big win according to the jackpot lottery probability.
In other words, the borderline is the number of jackpot lotteries per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) at which the difference ball becomes ±0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Various methods of calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of rented balls at 1000 yen/(average number of balls released in the jackpot game/total probability). where 1000
The number of balls rented per yen is generally 250 balls. Also, the average number of balls released in the jackpot game is the number of balls released per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Also, the total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical value. Then, the filling rate for the borderline is calculated as a ratio between the number of unit jackpot lotteries and the borderline. When this borderline fill rate exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous the player is.
If it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous the player. For example, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 18 times and the borderline is 20 times, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the expected ball payout value (including the borderline), the ball payout performance can be evaluated in consideration of the state of the nails and the surface properties of the game board 31. Therefore, the ball payout performance can be evaluated. It becomes possible to suggest more appropriately.

Further, when suggesting three or more ball payout performances out of a plurality of ball payout performances, it is preferable to suggest the ball payout performances by combining indexes having different properties. For example, a game setting value related to the jackpot probability, the number of unit jackpot lotteries (or base, continuous role ratio, role ratio) for each winning hole 313 to 316, and the expected ball output related to the jackpot probability and each winning hole 313 to 316 a value and
It is preferable to suggest ball output performance by combining For example, when a game setting value is suggested by the character as in the present embodiment, and the number of jackpot lottery numbers is simply suggested by the character mode, the expected ball payout value can also be suggested by the character mode to indicate the ball payout performance. preferable. In other words, when suggesting a ball payout performance of 3 or more, suggesting a ball payout performance of 3 or more by one character (suggestion target) rather than individually suggesting a ball payout performance of 3 or more by a plurality of characters or the like. is preferred.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, if the value of the jackpot lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402
: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggested image displaying flag, which is set to ON in step S2410, is set to ON (step S2411). If the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2412, and if the suggestive image displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2411: No). , terminates the ball output suggestive image display processing.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
If the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes),
The MPU 51 hides the ball payout performance suggestive image displayed in the sub-image display section 38 (step S2412), and sets the suggestive image displaying flag to off (step S2413).
), and terminates the ball output suggestive image display processing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the ball payout performance suggestive image display process executed when the variation pattern command is received, every time the number of variable games reaches 1000, the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed from the start of the variation game. An example has been described in which the payout performance suggesting image is not displayed when the next variable game is started, which is displayed on the image display section 38 . In other words, the sub image display section 38 is used as an image display section for displaying the ball output suggestive image. Therefore, while the symbol display unit 341 executes a variable game effect that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the sub-image display unit 38 displays an image suggesting ball payout performance, so that the player can see the ball payout performance. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the suggestion image is a performance suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big win.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of variable games reaches 1000 times, the sub-image display section 38 continues to display the ball payout performance suggesting image at least from the start to the end of the variable game. Although the case has been explained, it is not always necessary to display continuously from the start to the end of the variation game. For example, if a super reach production pattern or a special reach production pattern is selected as the production pattern, while the basic production (non-reach production) from the start of the fluctuation to the normal reach production is being executed (from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the basic performance) or until the development to the super ready-to-win performance (from the start of the variation to the end of the normal ready-to-win performance) is limited to the sub-image display part 38. may be displayed. In this case, while the super ready-to-win effect and the special ready-to-win effect are being executed, the variable game effect can be executed in the sub image display portion 38 together with the symbol display portion 341 . It should be noted that when the variable game effect is executed by the sub image display unit 38 during execution of the super ready-to-win effect or the special ready-to-win effect, the image of the variable game effect may be displayed as an upper layer of the ball payout performance suggestive image, or the payout ball may be displayed. The image of the variable game effect may be displayed after the performance suggesting image is hidden. In addition, in the variable game in which the ball output suggestive image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, when the sub-image display unit 38 selects an effect pattern in which an effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, the sub-image is displayed. The display of the ball payout performance suggesting image in the unit 38 may be carried over to the next and subsequent variation games of the variation game and executed.

[Jackpot game effect determination process]
In the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening/closing execution mode effect to be executed in the jackpot game are determined. Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2501, the MPU 51 executes opening effect determination processing for determining the opening effect to be executed from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the opening/closing execution mode. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggesting image suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery frequency can be determined together with the opening basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is to be started.

The basic opening effect is determined according to the value of an opening (OP) basic effect type counter based on an opening basic effect selection table defined for each game set value.
In the opening basic effect, a game set value suggesting character can be displayed in the same way as when the ball payout performance suggesting image is displayed in the variable game effect. The game set value suggesting character type and the game set value suggested by each game set value suggesting character are the same as the game set value suggesting character in the variable game effect. However, in the present embodiment, the game setting value suggesting character types do not include "Dugong", which suggests that the game setting value is an even number, and "Shark", which suggests that the game setting value is an odd number. First, the game set value suggestion character type is "Sam", which suggests that the game set value is 4, and "Marine", which suggests that the game set value is 3.
, "warin" which suggests that the game set value is 2, and "urin" which suggests that the game set value is 1.

Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the opening basic effect selection table referred to in the opening effect determination processing.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the basic opening effect selection table, "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected as the basic opening effect regardless of the game set value of 1-4.
Here, "no suggestion" means that, as the basic opening effect, an effect (an effect in which the game setting value suggesting character is not displayed) is different from the effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters are displayed. means to be executed. In other words, in the variable game state, the ball-out performance suggestion performance is executed under the specific condition that the number of unit jackpot lotteries reaches 1000 times, but in the opening of the jackpot game, the lottery based on the opening basic performance selection table is won. is performed as a specific condition. In the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is set to be most likely to be selected, thereby preventing the player from easily recognizing the game set value in the jackpot game. As a result, when the game set value is a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player, the player can switch to another game machine 1 in a short period of time.
It is possible to suppress the movement to 0. The higher the game set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the jackpot winning probability is), the more likely the player will select "no suggestion". That is, the higher the game set value, the more difficult it is for the game set value suggesting character to be displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the game set value is a high set value, and the game can be progressed while maintaining the player's expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

In addition, as the opening basic effect selection table, by adopting a table that does not sort "no suggestion", the performance information display image may always be displayed in the opening effect, and each game setting value "no suggestion" ” may be adopted.

Also, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is likely to be selected next to "no suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Sam", and when the game setting value is 3, "suggestion "None" is the most likely to be followed by "Marine", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine".
When the game set value is 2, "warin" is likely to be selected next to "no suggestion".
When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin".

As described above, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, "Sam" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4 and suggests that the game setting value is 4. In addition, since "Sam" is not sorted (not selected) at the game set value 1, the game set value 1 is negated when "Sam" is displayed in the opening effect, and the game set value 2 or more is confirmed. .
In that sense, "Sam" in the opening effect is a character whose game set value is determined to be 2 or more.

Further, "Marine" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 3, suggesting that the game set value is 3, and "Warin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 2. The character suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 1 and suggests that the game set value is 1.
Then, the higher the game set value is, the lower the probability that the game set value suggesting character that suggests the game set value is selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 10/100, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 15/100. When the set value is 2, the selection rate of "Warin" is 20/100, and when the game set value is 1, the selection rate of "Urin" is 25/100. As described above, when the game set value is a high set value, it is difficult to display a character suggesting that the game set value is a high set value in the opening effect. As a result, in the opening production,
When the game set value is the high set value, even if a character indicating that the game set value is the low set value is displayed, it is difficult to immediately determine that the game set value is the low set value. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game while keeping the player's expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the opening basic effect selection table, a table in which the probability of selecting a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value is the same for each game setting value may be employed.

On the other hand, the rank suggesting image is determined according to the value of the rank suggesting image type counter based on the unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times. Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the rank suggesting image type, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the opening unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table.

As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestive image includes images of whales (hereinafter referred to as “whale lucky”) in a plurality of modes. Specifically, as a rank suggestive image, "Kotobuki Kuji Lucky", "
GOLD Whale Lucky", "GOO Whale Lucky", "Normal Whale Lucky", "BA
Includes 6 types of images, "D Kuji Lucky" and "BLACK Kuji Lucky". “Koji Lucky” is an image that clearly indicates that the unit jackpot lottery count is “Rank S” (25 times or more). “GOLD Whale Lucky” is an image suggesting that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is “Rank S”. “GOO Whale Lucky” is an image suggesting that the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank A” (20 times or more and less than 25 times). “Normal Whale Lucky” is an image suggesting that the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank B” (15 times or more and less than 20 times). "BAD Whale Lucky" has a unit jackpot lottery number of "rank C" (
10 times or more and less than 15 times). "BLACK Kuji Lucky"
is an image suggesting that the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank D” (less than 10 times).

As shown in FIG. 43, in the opening unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, a rank suggesting image is defined according to the opening rank suggesting image type counter for each rank of unit jackpot lottery number of times. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank S", "GOLD lucky lottery" is most likely to be selected, and other types of lottery lucky lotteries are less likely to be selected. The number of unit jackpot lotteries is "
In the case of "Rank A", "GOO Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and other forms of Whale Lucky are less likely to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B", "normal lottery luck" is most likely to be selected, and other types of lottery lottery are less likely to be selected. When the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C", "BAD lucky draw" is most likely to be selected, and other types of lucky draws are less likely to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank D”, “BKACK lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and other types of lottery lucky lotteries are less likely to be selected. In addition, "Koji Lucky" is sorted only when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S".

In this way, "Koji Lucky" is selected only when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank S", and serves as a rank suggestion image that clearly indicates "rank S". "GO
LD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank S", and is a rank suggestion image that suggests "rank S". "GOO Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank A", and is a rank suggestion image that suggests "rank A". "Normal Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B", and is a rank suggestion image that suggests "rank B". "BAD Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank C", and is a rank suggestive image that suggests "rank C". "
BLACK Kuji Lucky” is likely to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is “rank D”, and is a rank suggestion image that suggests “rank D”.

Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an opening screen in a jackpot game. Figure 44
In the opening screen shown in (A), the game setting value is suggested to be 4 by displaying "Sam" as a game setting value suggesting character as an opening basic effect, and "Kotobuki Kuji Lucky" is indicated as a rank suggesting image. By being displayed, the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S
” is determined. Further, on the opening screen shown in FIG. 44(B), "Warin" is displayed as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, suggesting that the game setting value is 2, and "BLACK" as the rank suggesting image. The display of "Lucky Whale" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank D".

<Step S2502>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes ending effect determination processing for determining the ending effect to be executed after the end of the opening/closing execution mode until the end of the jackpot game. In the ending effect determination process, a basic ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is terminated and a rank suggestion image indicating the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries are determined. It should be noted that the ranking suggesting image determination processing in the ending effect is executed in the same manner as the opening effect determination processing in step S2502 described above.

Here, FIG. 45A is a diagram showing an example of the basic ending effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and FIG. FIG. 10 shows.

As shown in FIG. 45(A), in the variable game state, the performance suggesting ball output performance is executed under a specific condition that the number of unit jackpot lotteries reaches 1000 times. Similar to the opening, the ball-out performance suggesting effect is executed under the specific condition of winning the lottery based on the basic ending effect selection table. In the opening basic effect selection table, the game setting value is 1 to 1 as the basic ending effect.
4, "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected. Here, "not suggested" means
As with the basic opening effect, this means that a different effect (effect in which the game setting value suggesting characters are not displayed) than the effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters are displayed is executed. . Since "no suggestion" is most likely to be selected in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the game set value in the big winning game. As a result, when the game set value is a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from moving to another game machine 10 in a short period of time. The higher the game set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot), the more likely "no suggestion" is selected. That is, the higher the game set value, the more difficult it is for the game set value suggesting character to be displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the game set value is a high set value, and the game can be progressed while maintaining the player's expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

In addition, as the basic ending effect selection table, by adopting a table that does not sort "no suggestion", the performance information display image may always be displayed in the ending effect, and each game setting value "no suggestion ' may be used with the same probability of being selected.

Further, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is likely to be selected next to "no suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Sam", and when the game setting value is 3, "suggestion "None" is the most likely to be followed by "Marine", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Marine".
When the game set value is 2, "warin" is likely to be selected next to "no suggestion".
When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is more likely to be selected next to "No suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Urin". Also, only when the game set value is 4, there is a sorting of "everyone". When "everyone" is selected, all the game set value suggesting characters are displayed on the ending screen.

As described above, regarding the game setting value suggesting character, "Sam" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4 and suggests that the game setting value is 4. In addition, since "Sam" is not sorted (not selected) at the game set value 1, the game set value 1 is negated when "Sam" is displayed in the ending effect, and the game set value 2 or more is confirmed. .
In that sense, "Sam" in the ending effect is a character whose game set value is determined to be 2 or more.

Further, "Marine" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 3, suggesting that the game set value is 3, and "Warin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 2. The character suggests that the set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is likely to be selected when the game set value is 1 and suggests that the game set value is 1.
Then, the higher the game set value is, the lower the probability that the game set value suggesting character that suggests the game set value is selected. Specifically, when the game setting value is 4, the selection rate of "Sam" is 15/110, and when the game setting value is 3, the selection rate of "Marine" is 20/110. The selection rate of "Warin" when the set value is 2 is 25/110, and the selection rate of "Urin" when the game set value is 1 is 30/110. As described above, when the game set value is a high set value, it is difficult to display a character suggesting that the game set value is a high set value in the ending effect. As a result, in the ending production,
When the game set value is the high set value, even if a character indicating that the game set value is the low set value is displayed, it is difficult to immediately determine that the game set value is the low set value. As a result, it is possible to proceed with the game while keeping the player's expectation that the game set value is a high set value.

As the basic ending effect selection table, a table may be employed in which the probability of selecting a game setting value suggesting character that suggests the game setting value is the same for each game setting value.

As shown in FIG. 45(B), in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, a rank suggesting image is defined according to the ending rank suggesting image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times. . In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD whale lucky" is most likely to be selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank A", "GO".
"O Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and "Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B", and the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C".
"BAD lucky lottery" is most likely to be selected when , and "BKACK lucky lottery" is most likely to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank D". In addition, "Koji Lucky" is sorted only when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S".

Thus, in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, the number of unit jackpot lottery times of "Koji Lucky" is "Rank S" as in the opening effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table. "GOLD Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S", "GOO Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank A", and "Normal Kuji Lucky” suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is “Rank B”, and “BAD Kuji Lucky”.
indicates that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C", and "BLACK Whale Lucky" is a rank suggestive image that suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank D".

Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in a jackpot game. Figure 46
In the ending screen shown in (A), as the basic ending effect, "everyone" is displayed as a game set value suggesting character, thereby clearly indicating that the game set value is 4, and "normal whale lucky" is displayed as a rank suggesting image. The display suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B". On the ending screen shown in FIG. 46(B), "Marine" is displayed as a game set value suggesting character as the basic ending effect, suggesting that the game set value is 3, and "GOO Whale Lucky" as a rank suggesting image. is displayed, it is suggested that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank A".

<Step S2503>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario executed in the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode effect scenario defines a combination of round game effects executed in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the production scenario is based on an opening/closing execution mode production scenario table (
47 and 48). Further, the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario includes a effect scenario in which a performance information display image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 in a predetermined round game. Then, when an effect scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed is determined as an open/close execution mode effect scenario, a round game character selection table (see FIG. 49 ( A)) and the round game unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table (see FIG. 49B), the ball payout performance suggesting image to be displayed in the relevant round is determined.

Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are diagrams showing an example of the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process. Specifically, FIG. 47(A) is a 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. (B) is a 5R variable probability jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R variable probability jackpot. FIG. 48 is a 16R variable probability jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), the 5R normal jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is an effect scenario executed in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. stipulate. In this 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R normal jackpot open/close execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 0 to 4, a production scenario is determined in which an image suggesting the ball payout performance is displayed in one round, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 5 to 9, balls are produced in two rounds. A production scenario in which a performance suggestive image is displayed is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 10 to 1.
In 4, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 3 rounds is determined, and in the case where the value of the performance scenario type counter is 15 to 19, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in round 4 is determined. When the value of the scenario type counter is 20 to 24, an effect scenario is determined in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 5 rounds. Incidentally, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 25 to 79, the production scenario is determined in which the ball payout performance suggestion image is not displayed. In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed, the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed in the round game. be done. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, it is determined by a lottery whether or not the image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 47(B), the 5R probability variable jackpot open/close execution mode production scenario selection table is a production scenario executed in the jackpot game opening/closing execution mode when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot. stipulate. In this 5R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 5R probability variable jackpot open/close execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 0 to 4 or 25 to 29, the production scenario in which the image suggesting the ball payout performance is displayed in one round is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 5 to 9 or 30. ～3
In 4, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 2 rounds is determined, and when the value of the performance scenario type counter is 10 to 14 or 35 to 39, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 3 rounds is determined. is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 15 to 19 or 40
In ~44, the performance scenario in which the ball-distribution performance suggesting image is displayed in the 4th round is determined, and in the performance scenario type counter value of 20-24 or 45-49, the performance scenario in which the ball-distribution performance suggesting image is displayed in the 5th round is determined. In addition, the value of the production scenario type counter is 50 ~
At 79, an effect scenario is determined in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is not displayed. In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, when the production scenario selected by lottery has a round game in which the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed, the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed in the round game. be done. That is, in the open/close execution mode of the 5R probability variable jackpot game, it is determined by a lottery whether or not the ball output suggesting image is displayed.

As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47(A) and FIG. 47(B), in the case of the 5R variable probability jackpot, the probability that the ball output suggestive image is displayed is higher than in the case of the 5R normal jackpot. This gives 5
In the case of the R probability variable big win, it is possible to make a player who does not pay attention to the round game performance pay attention to the round game performance because of the relief of the probability variable big win. In addition, in the case of the 5R probability variable jackpot, the probability that the ball output performance suggesting image is displayed may be lower than that of the 5R probability variable jackpot, or may be the same probability as the 5R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R variable probability jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table defines the effect scenario to be executed in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 16R probability variable jackpot. . In this 16R probability variable jackpot opening/closing execution mode effect scenario selection table, the effect scenario is determined according to the value of the effect scenario type counter. Here, "○" in the 16R probability variable jackpot open/close execution mode production scenario selection table indicates a round game in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the production scenario type counter is 0 to 4, a production scenario is determined in which an image suggesting the ball payout performance is displayed in one round, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 5 to 9, balls are produced in two rounds. A production scenario in which a performance suggestive image is displayed is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 10
At 14, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 3 rounds is determined, and when the value of the performance scenario type counter is 15 to 19, a performance scenario in which an image suggestive of ball payout performance is displayed in 4 rounds is determined, and a performance scenario is determined. When the value of the scenario type counter is 20 to 24, the effect scenario in which the image suggesting the ball payout performance is displayed in 5 rounds is determined, and the value of the effect scenario type counter is 2.
In 5 to 29, an effect scenario is determined in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in 6 rounds, and in the case where the value of the effect scenario type counter is 30 to 34, an effect scenario in which an image suggestive of ball payout performance is displayed is determined in 7 rounds. When the value of the production scenario type counter is 35 to 39, a production scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in the 8th round is determined. The production scenario to be displayed is determined,
When the value of the production scenario type counter is 45 to 49, a production scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in the 10th round is determined, and when the value of the production scenario type counter is 50 to 54, the image showing the performance suggestive of ball payout is displayed in the 11th round. If the value of the production scenario type counter is 55 to 59, the production scenario in which the image suggesting the ball payout performance is displayed is determined in 12 rounds, and if the value of the production scenario type counter is 60 to 64, 13 rounds. , the production scenario in which the image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed is determined, and the value of the production scenario type counter is 65 to 69.
In the 14th round, a performance scenario in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed is determined, and in the case where the value of the performance scenario type counter is 70 to 74, a performance scenario in which an image suggestive of ball payout performance is displayed in round 15 is determined. When the value of the type counter is 75 to 79, an effect scenario is determined in which an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed in the 16th round.

In the 16R probability variable jackpot open/close execution mode effect scenario selection table, a ball payout performance suggestion image is always displayed in any one of the 1R to 16R round games. As a result, it is possible to make a player who does not pay attention to the round game effect feel relieved by the probability variable jackpot, but to pay attention to the round game effect. Incidentally, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, an effect scenario may be determined in which the ball output suggestive image is not displayed, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot.

Here, FIG. 49(A) is a diagram showing an example of a round game character selection table used when an effect scenario in which a ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed is selected in the open/close execution mode effect determination process. 49(B) is a diagram showing an example of an image selection table for suggesting the number of times of lottery for a unit jackpot lottery for a round game effect, which is used when an effect scenario in which an image indicating the performance of winning balls is displayed is selected in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process. be.

As shown in FIG. 49A, in the round game character selection table, "Sam" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 4, and "Marine" is most likely to be selected when the game setting value is 3. , when the game set value is 2, "warin" is most likely to be selected, and when the game set value is 1, "urin" is most likely to be selected. As described above, in the round game effect, as in the opening effect and ending effect, "Sam" suggests that the game set value is 4, and "Marine" suggests that the game set value is 3. , "Warin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game set value is 1.

As shown in FIG. 49B, in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, a rank suggesting image is defined according to the round game rank suggesting image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times. ing. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD whale lucky" is most likely to be selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank A", "GO".
"O Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and "Normal Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected when the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B", and the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C".
, "BAD Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and "BKACK Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected.
is most likely to be selected. In addition, "Kotobuki Kuji Lucky" has a unit jackpot lottery number of times of "Rank S
There is a split only if .

In this way, in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, as in the opening effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table and ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggesting image selection table, "Koji Lucky". indicates that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S", "GOLD Whale Lucky" indicates that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S", and "GOO Whale Lucky" indicates that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "Rank S". "Normal Whale Lucky" suggests that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank B", and "BAD Whale Lucky" indicates that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is "rank C". "BLACK Whale Lucky" is a rank suggesting image that suggests that the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank D".

Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the round game screen in the jackpot game. Figure 50
On the round game screen shown in (A), a scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed in the fifth round of the round game is selected as the opening/closing execution mode production scenario, and "Marine" is displayed as the game set value suggesting character. This suggests that the game set value is 3, and the display of "GOLD lucky lottery" as the rank suggestion image suggests that the unit jackpot lottery count is "rank S". Further, on the round game screen shown in FIG. 46(B), a scenario in which an image suggesting ball output performance is displayed in the round game of the second round is selected as the open/close execution mode effect scenario, and a game set value suggesting character "Summer" is selected. ” is displayed, it is suggested that the game set value is 4, and “Koji Lucky” is displayed as the rank suggestion image, thereby clearly indicating that the number of unit jackpot lotteries is “Rank S”. there is

<Step S2504>
Returning to the description of FIG. 40, at step S2504, the MPU 51
The RAM 512 is made to store the jackpot game effect determined in S2503. Specifically, M
PU51 determines the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, step S2
The ending basic effect type determined in step S2502 and the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503 are stored in the RAM 512, and if necessary, the opening,
Stores the type of ball-out performance suggestion image to be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in the opening/closing execution mode or the ending. As a result, in the jackpot game, the speaker 26 executes the sound output effect, and the illumination part 27 executes the lamp effect.

<Step S2505>
At step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a jackpot game effect command indicating the content of the jackpot game effect determined at steps S2501 to S2503. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the content of the ball payout performance suggesting image executed in the opening effect as necessary, and step S2.
The basic ending effect type determined in 502, the content of the ball payout performance suggestion image and the number of execution rounds executed in the opening effect as necessary, and the open/close execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503, if necessary The content of the ball payout performance suggestion image executed in the opening performance is transmitted to the display control device 6. - 特許庁As a result, in the jackpot game, the symbol display section 341 executes an image effect including an image indicating the performance of winning balls.

In the present embodiment, a ball payout performance suggestive image that suggests the ball payout performance in the jackpot game can be displayed. The player can concentrate on the jackpot game, and enjoy guessing the ball output performance from the image indicating the ball output performance displayed on the sub-image display section 38.例文帳に追加This will
The amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, in the jackpot game, the ball output suggestive image can be displayed on the sub-image display section 38 in any of the opening, the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending. Therefore, from the start to the end of the big win game, it is possible to focus on the big win game effect. Thus, by making the player pay attention to the jackpot game effect, it is possible to convey to the player the goodness of the jackpot game effect, which is easily neglected by the player.

It should be noted that in the jackpot game, an image suggesting ball payout performance can be displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 in any of the opening, opening/closing execution mode, and ending. A ball performance suggestive image may be displayed on the sub-image display section 38 .

In addition, when suggesting ball output performance in a jackpot game, as in the case of a variable game, instead of one or both of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times, the base, the continuous role ratio, the role ratio, The ball output performance may be suggested based on the expected ball output value and borderline sufficiency rate. That is, the ball output performance suggested in the jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times.

[Variation game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 27, variable game effect processing of secondary timer interrupt processing (step S2005)
Then, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, when the variable pattern command is received, the variable game effect conforming to the effect pattern determined in step S2303 of the command determination process of FIG. The sub-image display section 38 displays the ball output suggesting image determined in step S2304, which is executed by the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, and the like.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, ending effect and opening/closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 are executed. Here, Figure 5
1 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a jackpot game effect process.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2309 in the command determination process of FIG. When the start flag is ON (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is OFF (step S2601: No), the process proceeds to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the jackpot game production start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), MPU5
1 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to OFF (step S2602), executes the opening effect start process (step S2603), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2501 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. An opening effect start command is transmitted for causing the pattern display unit 341 to start the image effect of . As a result, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed in the symbol display section 341, and if it is determined that an image suggesting the ball output performance is displayed, the symbol display section 341 displays the image suggesting the ball output performance. be done.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 performs step S2 in the command determination process of FIG.
It is determined whether or not the round game effect start flag set to ON in 311 is set to ON, and when the round game effect start flag is ON (step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2605, and the opening/closing is performed. When the run mode start flag is off (step S
2604: No), the process moves to step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
When the round game effect start flag is on (step S2604: Yes), MPU5
1 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S2605), executes round game effect start processing (step S2606), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect in the corresponding round in the open/close execution mode effect scenario determined in step S2503 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. At the same time, it transmits to the display control device 6 a round game start command for causing the pattern display section 341 to start the image effect as the round game effect in the corresponding round. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. As a result, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed in the symbol display section 341, and if it is determined that an image suggesting the ball output performance is displayed, the symbol display section 341 displays the image suggesting the ball output performance. be done.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag that is set to ON in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON. ), the process proceeds to step S2608, and if the ending start flag is off (step S260
7: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the ending start flag is ON (step S2607: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to OFF (step S2608), executes the ending effect start process (step S2609), and ends the jackpot game effect process. do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2502 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. An ending effect start command is transmitted to cause the pattern display unit 341 to start the image effect of . As a result, an image corresponding to the basic ending effect is displayed in the symbol display section 341, and if it is determined that an image suggesting the performance of putting out balls is displayed, the image suggesting the performance of putting out balls is displayed in the pattern display section 341. be done.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and if the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( Step S2610: Yes)
, the process proceeds to step S2611, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game effect process ends.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the jackpot game production end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), MPU5
1 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to OFF (step S2611), executes the ending process (step S2612), and ends the jackpot game effect process.

By the way, a player selects a gaming machine based on individual reasons, and plays a game on that gaming machine. One of the criteria for a player to select a gaming machine is the ball output performance of the gaming machine. This ball payout performance is influenced by the ease of winning a prize in the first start prize-winning slot or the general prize-winning slot, that is, the frequency and the ball payout rate with which a jackpot lottery can be received. On the other hand, the ease of winning a prize in the first starting prize winning port or the general prize winning port is affected by the physical state of the game machine, for example, the state of nails driven into the game board, the surface properties of the game board, etc. . Here, the nails driven into the game board have individual differences between game machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the state of nails changes with age, and there are individual differences in the degree of this aging change between game machines. In addition, regarding the surface properties of the game board, there are individual differences in the shipment stage and aging among game machines. Therefore, the easiness of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening differs even among gaming machines of the same type manufactured at the same time and installed in the same hall at the same time. Since the physical state of such a gaming machine can be confirmed from the outside, players can confirm the ball output performance by checking the physical state of the gaming machine, and the game machine that is presumed to have high ball can be selected to play the game.

On the other hand, as a game machine, there is a game machine in which the game hall side can set the jackpot probability from multiple stages of jackpot probability (game set value). In such a game machine, even if the ball output performance based on the ease of winning the first start winning opening or the general winning opening is low, if the jackpot probability is set high, the jackpot game will be played. There are cases where the ball output performance as a total is high due to the large number of balls. On the contrary, even if the ball output performance is high based on the ease of winning the first start prize winning port or the general winning prize port, if the jackpot probability is set low, the jackpot game will be used. Due to the small number of balls, the total ball output performance may be low. Also, on the game hall side, while the game set value is increased, there is a possibility that a nail adjustment is made so that the game balls are less likely to enter the first start winning opening or the general winning opening. Therefore, in a gaming machine that allows the gaming hall side to set the jackpot probability from multiple stages of jackpot probability (game setting value), the physical state of the gaming machine can be confirmed from the outside, and the ball output performance is advantageous for the player. It cannot be determined whether it is a game machine.

Also, the jackpot probability (game set value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials, and while the jackpot may be won with a higher probability than the actual jackpot probability, the jackpot is won with a lower probability than the actual jackpot probability. Sometimes. In addition, the easiness of winning the game ball into the first winning hole or the like is difficult to converge in a short-time game, and variations occur. As a result, despite the high ball payout performance, they give up in a short time and move to another game machine, and conversely, they continue to play for a long time despite the low ball payout performance. things can happen.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in variation games and jackpot games,
The sub-image display section 38 can display a ball output performance suggesting image that suggests the ball output performance. Here, the ball output suggestive image is selected based on a plurality of indices including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, the player confirms the ball payout performance suggestive image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, and the game machine 10 based on a plurality of indices including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to estimate the performance of putting out balls, and it is possible to judge the performance of putting out balls individually for each of a plurality of indicators. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, for a player who selects the gaming machine 10 based on the ball payout performance, the player may give up in a short time and move to another gaming machine despite the high ball payout performance. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the game for a long time despite the fact that the is low.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the sub-image display section 3 is used to display the ball-out performance suggestion image in the variable game.
8, the display of the ball payout performance suggestive image in the variation game is performed by the symbol display unit 3.
41. In this case, it is preferable to display a ball payout performance suggestion image in a corner of the symbol display section 341 such as the lower right corner of the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 52) so as not to hinder the visibility of the variable game effect. Further, the ball-out performance suggestive image is not limited to one suggesting performance information by the character type and the character mode type. for example. Figure 52
, the performance information may be suggested by a combination of the character mode and the dialogue. Note that in the example shown in FIG.
Performance information is suggested, and the first rank such as the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is
Second performance information different from the performance information is suggested. Further, in addition to or instead of displaying words on the pattern display section 341, the performance of winning balls may be suggested by a voice effect by the speaker 26. - 特許庁

In the present embodiment, the ball payout performance suggestive image simultaneously suggests the ball payout performance based on a plurality of pieces of ball payout information (game set values and unit jackpot lottery times). A plurality of images corresponding to (ball output performance) may be included. In this case, the symbol display section 341 may display a plurality of ball-putting performance suggestive images, the sub-image display section 38 may display a plurality of ball-putting performance suggestive images, or as shown in FIG. Both the symbol display section 341 and the sub-image display section 38 may display the ball output performance suggesting image. In this way, the plurality of images associated with the performance information (ball output performance) suggest the ball output performance, thereby facilitating individual estimation of the plurality of ball output performances. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to determine whether to continue or stop the game according to the ball output performance, which is considered important when the player selects a gaming machine.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the sub image display section 38 displays the first ball payout performance suggesting image suggesting the first ball payout performance such as the game set value, and the unit jackpot is displayed in the lower right corner of the pattern display section 341. A second ball payout performance suggesting image suggesting a second ball payout performance serving as first performance information such as the rank of the number of lotteries is displayed at an overlapping timing. The sub image display section 38 displays the first ball payout performance suggestive image, and the symbol display section 341 displays the second ball payout performance suggestive image.
and the sub-image display section 38 can attract the player's attention. As a result, the player who has little interest in the game performance is given an opportunity to pay attention to the game performance, and the fun of the game performance can be conveyed to the player. In addition, by displaying the first ball-out performance suggesting image and the second ball-out performance suggesting image at the same timing, the player can view the first ball-out performance suggesting image and the second ball-out performance suggesting image at the same time. Since it can be confirmed in time, it is possible to easily determine the ball payout performance based on the two types of ball payout performance.

In addition, in the round game production, the game set value is suggested by the person character, and the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is suggested by the mode of the specific character, but as shown in FIG. First performance information such as a game set value is suggested by the character type to be displayed and introduced, and second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the number of unit jackpot lotteries is suggested by the frame color of the character introduction image. It may be suggested. Also, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern, background color, etc. of the character introduction image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball payout performance suggestive image can be displayed in both the variable game and the jackpot game, but the ball payout performance suggestive image may be displayed in one of the variable game and the jackpot game, In addition to or in place of one or both of the variation game and the jackpot game, the ball output suggesting image may be displayed in the customer waiting standby state (the state in which the variation display is not held and the game ball is not being fired). . For example, in the customer waiting state, an image suggesting ball payout performance is displayed on the condition that a predetermined operation (a long-pressing operation or repeated hitting operation) is performed on the operation button 20 and a command is input to a cross key (not shown). It is also conceivable to make it visible.

In addition, in the variable game, when the specific conditions are met as described above, the ball output suggesting image is displayed. , it is conceivable that the operation button 20 is operated at timing such as immediately after the start of the variable game or just before the end, or that a specific effect is executed. In this case, it is preferable that the specific effect is a effect that the player does not misunderstand that it is a effect that suggests the result of the lottery of the jackpot lottery. .
Also, the specific effect may be an effect such as a request to operate the operation button 20 . When a specific condition is met, the player will be able to
It becomes possible to anticipate the timing at which the ball output performance suggesting effect is executed. As a result, the player can advance the game while anticipating the timing at which the payout performance suggesting performance is executed and looking forward to the arrival of the timing, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the jackpot game, it is only necessary to display an image suggesting ball output performance in at least one of the opening, the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending. You may make it display a ball output performance suggestion image by .

Further, it is conceivable that the indication of the ball-out performance is performed by an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or by a lamp effect by the illumination part 27 in addition to or instead of the image effect. For example, the ball output performance may be suggested by the type of music (BGM) output in the jackpot game.
Also, the performance of winning balls may be suggested by changing the music (BGM) during the jackpot game. When a change in music (BGM) suggests ball-out performance, the player can listen to the music ( It is possible to estimate the performance of putting out balls based on the BGM). In addition, since the ball-rolling performance suggestion performance is a music-changing performance, even a player who is indifferent to the music (BGM) pays attention to the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 in order to guess the ball-rolling performance. Let the music (B
GM) can be entertained.

Further, when suggesting the ball payout performance by changing the music (BGM), the ball payout performance may be suggested by a combination of the music before the change and the music after the change. For example, it is conceivable that the song type before the change suggests the game set value and other ball payout performance, and the song type after the change suggests other ball payout information such as the number of unit jackpot lotteries. When the combination of the music before and after the change suggests the ball payout performance, the player can determine the ball payout based on the combination of the music before and after the change as well as whether or not the music changes. performance can be estimated. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the music output from the speaker 26 even if the player is indifferent to the music.

Further, when the ball payout performance is suggested by a change in music (BGM), the ball payout performance may be suggested by the timing at which the music is changed (for example, a round in the opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, in the round game corresponding to the game setting value (for example, 4 rounds when the game setting value is 4), the BGM may be changed at a higher probability than in other round games. In addition, when the game set value is an odd number (1 or 3), the BGM is changed at a higher probability in the odd round than in the even round, and when the game set value is an even number (2 or 4), the odd number The BGM may be changed at a higher probability in even-numbered rounds than in rounds. When the ball payout performance is suggested by a change in music (BGM), the ball payout performance can be estimated based on the number of rounds of the round game in which the music change occurred. Therefore, the player can estimate the ball payout performance not only by whether or not the music output from the speaker 26 will change, but also by the number of rounds in which the music change will occur. As a result, even a player who is indifferent to the music can be made to pay attention to the music output from the speaker 26, and the pattern is displayed to confirm the number of the round of the round game in which the music change occurred. It is possible to draw attention to a display unit such as the unit 341 as well. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to visually recognize the round game effect, and to convey the fun of the round game effect to the player.

It should be noted that when suggesting the performance of ball payout by changing the music (BGM), it is also possible to suggest the performance of payout performance by both the combination of the music before the change and the music after the change and the timing at which the music is changed. be done.

[Other embodiments]
Another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the production scenario in the opening and closing execution mode based on the opening and closing execution mode production scenario selection table including the opening and closing execution mode production scenario in which the ball output suggestive image is displayed. is determined. That is, the case where whether or not the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed in the round game in the open/close execution mode depends on the production scenario selected.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when game balls exceeding the upper limit number ("9" in this embodiment) are won in the variable winning port 316 in the round game (when so-called over winning occurs),
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game in the open/close execution mode. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode effect determination processing (see step S2503 in FIG. 40) of the jackpot game effect determination processing, the opening/closing execution mode effect that does not include the opening/closing execution mode effect scenario in which the ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed is displayed. It also differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the presentation scenario in the open/close execution mode is determined based on the scenario selection table.

55 to 59, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIGS. 55 and 56 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round game end command and the variable winning opening winning command have been received in the command determination process of the first embodiment. A decision process has been added.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is none of the variation pattern command, the jackpot game start command, and the round game end command (step S
2302, S2307 and S2310 are all No), and it is determined whether or not a round game end command has been received (step S2701). In addition, the round game end command is
For example, in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16, it is set when the round game is terminated, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. .

When the MPU 51 receives the round game end command (step S2701: Y
es), the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the jackpot game effect process in FIG. 57 to be described later. Also, when the round game end command has not been received (step S2701: No), the process proceeds to step S2312 in FIG.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
When the MPU 51 has not received the round game end command (step S270
1: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, if the received command is neither the ending start command, the jackpot game end command, the game set value change command, or the unit jackpot lottery number update command (steps S2313, S2315, S2317 and S2319
No), it is determined whether or not a variable winning opening winning command has been received (step S2
703). It should be noted that the variable winning opening winning command is, for example, step S in the main process of FIG.
In 1303, when a prize has been won in the variable winning port 316, when setting the prize ball command, it is set in the RAM 412 together with the prize ball command, and step S1 in the main process of FIG.
This is a flag sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of 301 .

When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning opening winning command (step S2703: Yes
s), the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S2704), and the command determination process ends. The variable winning opening winning flag is referred to in step S3001 of the ball payout performance suggestive image display processing in FIG. 59 described later.

[Jackpot game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing of this embodiment, the contents of the round game effect start processing are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. Along with this, in the jackpot game effect processing of the present embodiment, a ball payout performance suggestive image display process is added, and a process (step) necessary for executing the round game effect start process and the ball payout performance suggestive image display process is added. ing. Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing executed by the sound lamp control device 5. As shown in FIG.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, on condition that the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes), the round game effect start process is executed. (Step S2801), the round game running flag is set to ON (step S2802). Details of the round game effect start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the round game in-execution flag is a flag indicating that the round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 to determine whether or not to execute the payout performance suggestive image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, MPU51 judges whether the flag during round game execution set to ON by step S2802 is set to ON. When the round game in-execution flag is set to ON (step S2803: Yes), the MPU 51 executes ball output suggesting image display processing (step S2804), and executes the jackpot game effect processing. In the ball putting performance suggestive image display process, when it is determined that the ball putting performance suggestive image is to be displayed on the sub image display section 38, a process for displaying the ball putting performance suggestive image on the sub image display section 38 is executed. be. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to display the ball payout performance suggestive image during execution of the round game, and the ball payout performance suggestive image is displayed on the sub-image display section 38 during the round game. The details of the displayed ball performance suggestive image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 .

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 performs step S27 of the command determination process in FIG.
It is determined whether or not the round game effect end flag set to ON in 02 is set to ON. When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game execution flag indicating that the round game is being executed to OFF (step S2806), The game effect end flag is set to OFF (step S2807), and the big hit game effect processing ends. on the other hand,
MPU51, when the round game end flag is set to OFF (step S280
5: No), the process moves to 2607;

[Round game production start processing]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, the process of starting the round game effect is executed. Here, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON. The suggestive image displaying flag is a flag for displaying a ball payout performance suggestive image on the symbol display unit 341 in the round game, and is shown in FIG.
9 is set to ON in step S3008 of the ball output performance suggestive image display processing. MPU
51 is when the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes
s), the process proceeds to step S2902, and when the ball output suggestive image displaying flag is set to OFF (step S2901: No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON (step S290), the MPU 51
1: Yes).
512 is read out (step S2902),
The contents of the ball output suggestive image are deleted from 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 sends a round game start command to the display control device 6.
Send to The round game start command is a command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect of the round game effect. Further, when the suggestive image displaying flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the round game start command includes information regarding the ball payout performance suggestive image type. As a result, in the round game, the ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed.

[Image display processing suggesting ball output performance]
In the ball payout performance suggestive image display process executed in step S2804 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, the presence or absence of the display of the ball payout performance suggestive image in the opening/closing execution mode and the image type are determined. Here, FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the ball output suggesting image display process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variable winning opening winning flag, which is set to ON in step S2704 in the command determination process of FIG. 56, is set to ON. When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3002, and when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No). , terminates the ball output suggestive image display processing.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes),
The MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3002) and sets the variable winning opening winning flag to OFF (step S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls that have won the variable winning opening 316 .

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the winning counter value (the number of balls entering the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit. The "upper limit number" is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls that close the variable winning opening 316 before a predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses. 9”. That is, the MPU 51 is the variable winning opening 3
At 16, it is determined whether or not an over winning in which game balls exceeding the upper limit number have entered has occurred. Here, when the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004:
If Yes), the process proceeds to step S3005, and if the value of the winning counter does not exceed the upper limit (step S3004: No), the payout performance suggestive image display process ends.

<Step S3005>
If the winning counter value exceeds the upper limit (step S3004: Yes), the MPU
51 determines whether or not the round game is the final round in the open/close execution mode (step S3005). When the round game is the final round (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the payout performance suggestive image display process. That is, when there is an over-win in the final round in the opening/closing execution mode, the ball payout performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, when the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines a ball-out performance suggestion image (step S3006),
The RAM 512 is made to store the content of the displayed ball performance suggestive image (step S3007). and,
The MPU 51 sets the ball output suggesting image display flag to ON (step S3008),
The ball output performance suggestive image display processing is ended. That is, when an over-win occurs in a round game (except for the final round) in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 51 sets the ball payout performance suggestion image display flag to ON, so that the next round game in which the over-win occurs. In the round game of , a ball output performance suggesting image is displayed.

By the way, in order to save the number of game balls to be launched in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a so-called technique of stopping the launch of game balls in the interval. When performing such a stop shot, the player repeatedly launches and stops launching the game ball while counting the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player watches the variable prize winning opening 316 while hardly checking the symbol display portion 341 or the sub-image display portion 38 in the round game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when over-winning occurs in the round game (excluding the final round) in the opening and closing execution mode, the ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game next to the round game in which the over-winning has occurred. be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who performs the stopping shot launch an extra game ball for generating an over-win, and it is possible to draw attention to the symbol display part 341 in the round game. In particular, since a player who performs stop shots has a strong tendency to emphasize ball output performance as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10,
In order to draw attention to the symbol display portion 341 and the sub-image display portion 38, an image suggesting ball-out performance is displayed on the sub-image display portion 38 (or both the symbol display portion 341 or the sub-image display portion 38 and the symbol display portion 341). It is very significant to display

In addition, when the performance suggestive performance is executed in the next round game after the round game in which there is an over-win for the variable winning port 316, the performance suggestive performance is executed in a short time after the over-win. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the timing at which the performance suggesting effect is executed, and can prevent forgetting to confirm the performance suggesting effect.

In the present embodiment, if there is an over-win in the final round of the opening/closing execution mode, the ball-out performance suggesting image is not displayed. may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the payout performance suggesting effect is not executed when there is an over-win in the final round game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, in the variation game, the character of the ball output performance suggestive image is selected based on the game set value suggestive character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to the game set value (see FIG. 34). (see steps S2404 and S2405 of FIG. 34), and the case where the character mode is determined based on the character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times (see FIG. 34 Step S2 of
407 and S2408).

On the other hand, in the variable game, the game setting value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times are respectively converted into points, and the ball output performance suggesting image is displayed based on the table selected according to the total point obtained by totaling these points. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the ball output performance suggesting image is determined and displayed on the sub-image display section 38 . In addition, hereinafter, the “total point” may be referred to as “total Pt” including reference drawings.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Image display processing suggesting ball output performance]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the ball output suggestive image display process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball output suggestive image display process, when the variation pattern command is received and the value of the jackpot lottery counter is "0" (step S2402: Yes)
That is, when the number of jackpot lotteries reaches 1000 times, the game set value and the number of unit jackpot lotteries stored in the RAM 512 are acquired (steps S2404 and S2406), and the total points (total Pt) are calculated (step S3101). . Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates a total point by adding the additional points set according to the game setting value and the additional points set according to the unit jackpot lottery number of times.

Here, FIGS. 61A and 61B are diagrams showing an example of a point table used in the ball output suggestive image display process.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the set point table defines additional points according to game set values. In the setting point table, when the game setting value is 4, the additional points are 4 points, when the game setting value is 3, the additional points are 3 points, and when the game setting value is 2, the additional points are 2 points. is 1, the additional point is 1 point. In other words, the higher the game set value, the higher the points added to the game set value.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), the number-of-lottery-points table defines addition points according to the number of lotteries (rank) for unit jackpots. In the lottery number point table, if the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 25 or more (rank S), the additional points are 5 points, and if the unit jackpot lottery numbers are 20 or more and less than 25 (rank A), the additional points are 4 points. , If the number of unit jackpot lotteries is 15 or more and less than 20 times (rank B), the additional point is 3 points, and if the unit jackpot lottery number is 10 or more and less than 15 times (rank C), the additional point is 2.
Points: When the unit jackpot lottery count is less than 10 times (rank D), the additional point is 1 point. That is, the additional points for the number of unit jackpot lotteries (rank) are set higher as the number of unit jackpot lotteries increases (the higher the rank), and the higher the points, the higher the ball output performance.

As described above, in the setting point table shown in FIG. 61(A), the higher the game setting value, the higher the additional points are set. In the lottery number point table shown in FIG. is higher), the additional points are set higher. Therefore, the higher the total points, which are indexed by the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times, the higher the ball output performance. In other words, the total points are an index having a correlation with the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 . For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 13 times,
Since the additional point for the game setting value is 1 point and the additional point for the unit jackpot lottery number is 2 points, the total point is 3 points (1 point + 2 points),
It shows that the ball output performance is low. In addition, the game setting value is 3 and the unit jackpot lottery number is 27.
If it is a time, the total points will be 8 points (3 points + 5 points), which indicates that the performance of putting out balls is high.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation start command is received, the number of jackpot lotteries is 100.
The total points are calculated when it is determined that the number of times has reached 0, but the timing for calculating the total points may be another timing. For example, the total point may be calculated each time a variation start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (total point suggesting character image) as an image suggesting the total points calculated in step S3101, and displays the selected character image on the sub-image display section 38. display (step S2408). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of jackpot lotteries has reached 1000 times, the ball payout performance suggesting image is displayed. It may be displayed only in the variable game, may be displayed across, for example, a plurality of variable games, or may be continuously displayed in the jackpot game.

Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a total point suggestion character selection table referred to in the ball output performance suggestion image display processing.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the total point suggestion character selection table, total points (
When the total Pt) is "8" or "9", "Sam" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected. When the total points (total Pt) is "6" or "7", "Marine" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected. When the total points (total Pt) is "4" or "5", "Warin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected. When the total points (total Pt) is "2" or "3", "Urin" is most likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected.

In this way, "Sam" is likely to be selected when the total points (total Pt) is "8" or "9", and the character suggests that the total points (total Pt) is high (high ball output performance). , "Marine" is likely to be selected when the total points (total Pt) is "6" or "7", and the total points (total Pt) is relatively high (ball output performance is relatively high). It is a character that suggests high things), and "Warin" has a total point (total Pt) of "
4" or "5" are likely to be selected, and the total points (total Pt) are relatively low (
"Urin" is likely to be selected when the total points (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the total points (total Pt
) is low (low ball output performance).

By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the ball payout performance suggesting image is determined using a table prepared for each of the two pieces of performance information, that is, the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number are respectively converted into points, and the ball payout performance is evaluated as the total points, so the ball payout performance suggestion image is determined by one table. Therefore, in this embodiment, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 required for storing the table is reduced compared to the first embodiment described above, and the arithmetic processing procedure can be simplified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed based on the total points (ball-out performance) in the variable game, but the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed based on the total points (ball-out performance) in the jackpot game. may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the total points of the additional points based on the game set value and the additional points based on the number of unit jackpot lotteries are used as an indicator of ball output performance. It is also conceivable to set an index correlated with the ball payout performance based on a combination of two or more pieces of performance information other than the combination of , and to suggest the ball payout performance based on the index.

Further, instead of adding the additional points based on the game setting value and the additional points based on the unit jackpot lottery number of times, an index is set by subtracting, multiplying or dividing these points and correlated with the ball output performance. or set an index correlated with ball output performance based on a predetermined formula,
It is also conceivable to suggest the performance of putting out balls based on the obtained index.

Also, one of the first performance information such as the game setting value and the second performance information other than the first performance information is converted into points, and balls are put out based on an index that is added to the numerical value indicating the other performance information. It is also conceivable to suggest performance.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

Further, in the case of determining the ball output performance suggestive image in the above-described second embodiment, the method of selecting the ball output performance suggestive image (character image) in the ball output performance suggestive image display processing in the present embodiment may be adopted. can also

[Fourth embodiment]
In the above-described third embodiment, the game setting value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number of times are converted into points, and the ball payout performance is selected based on the table selected according to the total point (ball payout performance) obtained by totaling these points. The case where the suggestive image is determined has been described (see steps S3101 and S3102 in FIG. 60).

On the other hand, the present embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is calculated as the payout expected value, and performance information is suggested based on the payout expected value.

63 and 64, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Image display processing suggesting ball output performance]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the ball output suggestive image display process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the ball output suggestive image display process, when the fluctuation pattern command is received and the value of the jackpot lottery counter is "0" (step S2402: Yes)
That is, when the number of jackpot lottery times reaches 1000 times, the expected ball output value is calculated (step S3201).

As described above, the expected ball output value is, for example, the expected number of output balls (payout number of game balls). The expected value of paid out balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) and the expected number of paid out balls (number of paid out game balls) are the same. number of balls) is more than 100%, and it is less than 100% when the expected number of paid-out balls (number of game balls to be paid out) is less. In other words, when the expected ball output value exceeds 100%, it is advantageous to the player, and the higher the value is, the higher the ball output performance is. On the other hand, when the expected ball output value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous to the player, and the lower the value is, the lower the ball output performance is.

In addition, the expected number of balls paid out (number of game balls paid out) is normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variable gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the theoretical ratio of the jackpot gaming state,
It can be calculated from the theoretical number of balls in each game state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each game state is
For example, game setting value (jackpot probability in low probability mode and high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), distribution rate of jackpot type (see FIG. 7C), unit jackpot lottery It is calculated based on the number of times, the role ratio, etc. In addition, the number of balls to be paid out (the number of game balls to be paid out) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of game balls paid out) other than the normal game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state, and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the allocation rate of the jackpot type (Fig. 7 (C
)), calculated based on the number of theoretical difference balls, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc. for each jackpot type.

Also, the expected ball output value may be evaluated as a sufficiency rate with respect to the borderline. here,
The borderline is a unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to make the expected ball output value 100%
This is the number of jackpot lotteries required for a winning ball rental, and this borderline is calculated on the assumption that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery will be a big win according to the jackpot lottery probability.
In other words, the borderline is the number of jackpot lotteries per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) at which the difference ball becomes ±0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. Various methods of calculating the borderline have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of rented balls at 1000 yen/(average number of balls released in the jackpot game/total probability). where 1000
The number of balls rented per yen is generally 250 balls. Also, the average number of balls released in the jackpot game is the number of balls released per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Also, the total probability is the average jackpot winning probability when the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode are distributed according to the theoretical value. Then, the filling rate for the borderline is calculated as a ratio between the number of unit jackpot lotteries and the borderline. When this borderline fill rate exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous the player is.
If it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous the player. For example, when the unit jackpot lottery count is 18 times and the borderline is 20 times, the sufficiency rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 creates a character image (expected ball payout value suggestive character image) as a ball payout performance suggestive image suggesting the expected ball payout value calculated in step S3201.
to display the selected character image on the sub-image display section 38 (step S2
408).

Here, FIG. 64(A) is a diagram showing an example of a table of character selection table for suggesting the expected ball payout value referred to in the process of displaying an image indicating the expected ball payout performance, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a rank correspondence table.
is.

As shown in FIG. 64A, in the expected payout value suggesting character selection table, the expected payout value suggesting character type is defined for each expected payout value rank in accordance with the expected payout value suggesting effect selection table. Here, the expected ball payout rank is an index indicating the magnitude of the expected ball payout value, and is shown in FIG.
As shown in 4(B), "Rank S" when the expected value of payout is 115% or more, "Rank A" when the expected value of payout is 105% or more and less than 115%, and the expected value of payout. 95% or more 10
"Rank B" is less than 5%, and "Rank B" is when the expected ball output value is 85% or more and less than 95%.
"Rank C", and "Rank D" when the expected ball output value is less than 85%.
In other words, in the expected ball output ranks, the expected ball output value is higher (the ball output performance is higher) in the order of “rank S”, “rank A”, “rank B”, “rank C” and “rank D”. is advantageous to the player in the order of

Returning to the description of FIG. 64A, in the expected ball payout value suggesting character selection table, when the expected ball payout value rank is “rank S”, “GOLD lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected. Lucky is hard to choose. If the expected ball output rank is "rank A", "G
OO Whale Lucky" is most likely to be selected, and the other types of Whale Lucky are less likely to be selected. When the expected payout value rank is “rank B”, “normal lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lottery lucky are less likely to be selected. When the payout expected value rank is “rank C”, “BAD lucky draw” is most likely to be selected, and other forms of lucky draw are less likely to be selected. When the expected payout value rank is “rank D”, “BKACK lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and the other forms of lottery lucky are less likely to be selected. Also, "Koji Lucky" is sorted only when the expected ball output rank is "Rank S".

In this way, "Koji Kuji Lucky" is selected only when the expected ball payout rank is "rank S", and serves as an expected ball payout value suggestion image that clearly indicates "rank S". "GO
LD Kuji Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected payout value rank is "rank S", and is an expected payout value suggestion image that suggests that the expected payout value rank is "rank S". "GOO Kuji Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball payout value rank is "rank A", and is an expected ball payout value suggestion image that suggests "rank A". "Normal Whale Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected ball payout value rank is "rank B", and is an expected ball payout value suggestion image that suggests that the expected ball payout value rank is "rank B". "BAD Lucky" is likely to be selected when the expected payout value rank is "rank C", and is an expected payout value suggestive image that suggests that the expected payout value rank is "rank C". "
BLACK Kuji Lucky” is likely to be selected when the expected ball output rank is “Rank D”, and “
The image is an expected value suggestion image that suggests that the player is ranked D.

By the way, in the above-described third embodiment, the ball payout performance suggesting image is displayed based on the two pieces of performance information, that is, the game set value and the unit jackpot lottery number of times. Therefore, the above-described third embodiment has the advantage of simple arithmetic processing. On the other hand, the game set value is an index that reflects the probability of a big win, and has no correlation with the distribution of the big win types. In addition, the number of unit jackpot lotteries is
It relates to the number of jackpot lottery numbers in the normal game state (low-probability mode and non-high-frequency support mode), and has no correlation with the ball output in game states other than the normal game state. Therefore, in the above-mentioned third embodiment, the number of balls released in the jackpot game state (number of difference balls), the average number of consecutive games for the first hit, the number of balls released in the time-saving game state and the variable game state (number of difference balls) etc. are not taken into consideration, and although there is an advantage as a simple method, the ball payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is not appropriately reflected.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball payout performance is evaluated based on the total expected ball payout value including game states other than the normal game state, and the ball payout performance is suggested. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 to the player based on the performance information that appropriately reflects the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the ball payout expectation value (ball payout performance) in the variable game, but the ball payout performance suggestion image is displayed based on the ball payout expectation value in the jackpot game. may be displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the above-described first embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

Further, in the case of determining the ball output performance suggestive image in the above-described second embodiment, the method of selecting the ball output performance suggestive image (character image) in the ball output performance suggestive image display processing in the present embodiment may be adopted. can also

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sub-image display section 38 indicates the payout performance has been described.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game set values are displayed on the special main display portion, and the game set values become visible by downward movement of the retention box arranged on the front side of the special main display portion. is different from the embodiment of

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 66 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a crew device 36 (an example of a sorting device) and a retention box 39 (
visibility restriction means), a discharge port 319, and a special main display portion 37a (performance information display means) are provided.

Also, FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing an example of the crew device 36, and FIG.
68(B) is a cross-sectional view along the X2--X2 line of FIG. 67. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the clown device 36 distributes game balls hit to the right side area of the game board 31 to either a normal ball entrance 367 or a special out ball mouth 363, which will be described later. . The croon device 36 is dish-shaped having a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 surrounding the bottom wall 361 . The bottom wall 361 is circular in plan view, and has a high bottom portion 361a.
, a lower bottom portion 361b, and an inclined portion 361c that slopes downward to the left and is provided between the higher bottom portion 361a and the lower bottom portion 361b.

The high bottom portion 361a constitutes the right portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 36 having a special out ball port 363 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 361a.
4 is provided. This special out ball passage 364 is adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c,
It is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 361a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 entering through the special out ball opening 363 as will be described later to the retention box 39, and has a cylindrical shape with an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. is formed in The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 363 does not enter the various prize winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317 . Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 363 is not expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it passes through the special out ball mouth 363, or When introduced into the out ball passage 364, it is treated as an out ball.

The special out ball opening 363 is an upper opening of the special out ball passage 364, and the high bottom part 361
Open at a. In addition, the special out ball mouth 363 is surrounded by a blocking wall 365 (blocking means) projecting upward from the high bottom portion 361a. This obstruction wall 365 obstructs the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 to make it difficult to enter the game ball.
It includes a large blocking wall 365a and a small blocking wall 365b.

The large obstruction wall 365 a is provided in the right half of the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 363 . That is, the large obstruction wall 365a is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall 362 and far from the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs entry of the game ball 99 from the right half side of the special out ball opening 363. FIG. Also, the height dimension of the large obstruction wall 365 a is set larger than the radius of the game ball 99 . Therefore, the game ball 99 cannot be expected to enter the special out ball mouth 363 from the side of the large obstruction wall 365a.

On the other hand, the small obstruction wall 365b is provided in the left half of the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 363. As shown in FIG. That is, the small obstruction wall 365b is provided at a portion far from the peripheral wall 362 and close to the inclined portion 361c, and obstructs entry of the game ball 99 from the left half side of the special out ball opening 363. Also, the height dimension of the small obstruction wall 365 b is set smaller than the radius of the game ball 99 . Therefore,
For the special out ball 363, compared to the game ball 99 from the large obstacle wall 365a side (the right half side of the special out ball 363), The game ball 99 can be expected to enter from the club side).

The low bottom portion 361b constitutes the left portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward toward the center. A normal passageway 368 having a normal ball entrance 367 is provided in the lower bottom portion 361b. The normal passage 368 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c except for a portion along the peripheral wall 362 of the low bottom portion 361b. This normal path 368 is a game ball 99 entered through the normal ball entrance 367.
to the lower right side of the game board 31, and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 363. In addition, a guide member 369 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 368 to release the game ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a fixed position.
The guide member 369 has a smaller cross-sectional area on the lower side than the upper side, and the lower portion of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 .

In such a croon device 36 , the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 moves along the peripheral wall 362 and on the bottom wall 361 . As a result, the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 36 . Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 are
For example, the kinetic energy is reduced, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 367 by colliding with the peripheral wall 362 of the crew device 36, the obstructing wall 365, and other game balls 99. A game ball 99 entering the normal ball entrance 367 moves through the normal passage 368 and the guiding member 369 and is released from a fixed position. A game ball 99 released from a fixed position can enter the second winning hole 315 and the variable winning hole 316 and can pass through the through gate 317 .

On the other hand, some of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 (for example, 0.01% to 1%) usually change their moving direction at the periphery of the ball entrance 367 and collide with other game balls 99. Then, the ball moves toward the small obstruction wall 365b of the special out ball 363, overcomes the small obstruction wall 365b, and enters the special out ball 363. A game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 363 moves through the special out ball passage 364 and is discharged toward the retention box 39. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the special out ball 363 is provided on the high bottom portion 361a of the bottom wall 361, the normal ball entrance 367 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 363, and the special out ball 363 obstructs the ball. Since it is surrounded by the wall 365, the special out ball opening 363 is remarkably difficult to enter the game ball 99 compared to the normal ball entrance 367, but instead of all or part of these, or In addition, it is conceivable to make it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 363 by other means. For example, generating a magnetic or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball 363, forming an air curtain by ejecting air in the periphery of the special out ball 363, special out Arranging an obstacle (a form different from the blocking wall 365) that blocks the ball from entering the ball mouth 363 can be considered.

Here, FIG. 69(A) is a front view showing the stay box 39 and its surroundings when the stay box 39 is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69(B) is a vertical sectional view of FIG. ) is shown in Fig. 6
9(A) is a cross-sectional view along the X3-X3 cutting line. FIG. 70(A) shows the residence box 3
FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69B showing the stay box 39 and its surroundings when 9 is at its lower limit position, and FIG. 70(C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(C) shown in FIG.
FIG. 70(D) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69(B) showing the retention box 39 and its surroundings when the retention box 39 is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position, and FIG. FIG. 69C is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69C showing the box 39 and its surroundings;

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the retention box 39 receives the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 363 of the crew device 36, and keeps the game ball 99 inside until a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is something to stay. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a certain period of time elapses after the retention box 39 is lowered to the lower limit position (see FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B)), which will be described later. The retention box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows reception of game balls 99 . The retention box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left wall 392c, a right wall 392d and a bottom wall 392e, and these walls 392a to 392e define a retention space 393 in which a certain number of game balls 99 are retained. It is The stay box 39 is entirely opaque (for example, black or white), so that the rear side of the stay box 39 is invisible or difficult to see.

The stay box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) covering the entire front of the special main display section 37a and a lower limit position (see FIG. 70 (
A) and FIG. 70(B)) can be moved in the vertical direction D2. As shown in FIG. 71, the residence box 39 is connected to the motor 39 connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp controller 5.
driven by a. Specifically, the retention box 39 is moved downward by, for example, the MPU 51 rotating the motor 39a in the forward direction, and is moved upward by the MPU 51 rotating the motor 39a in the reverse direction. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a, the retention box 39 can be held at a predetermined position.

As shown in FIGS. 70(C) and 70(D), the retention box 39 can be stopped at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the stay box 39 is positioned at a plurality of intermediate positions, a part of the special main display section 37a is visible, and the stay box 3
9 does not communicate with the discharge port 319 of the game board 31 . In other words, stay box 3
9 is in the middle position, the game balls 99 in the retention box 39 are retained in the retention box 39 without being discharged to the outside. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the retention box 3
9 can be stopped at three intermediate positions (see FIGS. 73 and 74) corresponding to lowering levels 1-3. At the intermediate position of the downward movement level 1, it is possible to determine whether the segment A of the special main display section 37a is turned on or off, and at the intermediate position of the downward movement level 2, it is possible to judge whether the segments B and F of the special main display section 37a are turned on or off It is possible, and at the intermediate position of downward movement level 3, it is possible to determine whether the segment G of the special main display portion 37a is lit or not. In addition to the positions corresponding to the lowering levels 1 to 3, or in place of at least one of the positions corresponding to the lowering levels 1 to 3, the intermediate positions are, for example, the segments C and E of the special main display section 37a. It may be set at a position where it is possible to determine whether the light is on or off, or at a position where it is possible to determine whether the segment D of the special main display portion 37a is on or off. The range in which the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized differs at each intermediate position, and the special main display portion 37a changes as the stay box 39 approaches the lower limit position.
becomes visible. In addition, the position of the stay box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying therein (the number of staying game balls), and the higher the number of staying game balls, the lower it is positioned (see FIG. 74(C)). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG.

The retention box 39 does not necessarily have to be entirely opaque, and at least one of the front wall 392a and the rear wall 392b may be opaque. Moreover, the stay box 39 is allowed to be transparent within the range where the special main display portion 37a is invisible or difficult to see when it is at the upper limit position.

An opening 394 is formed in the lower portion of the rear wall 392b of the retention box 39. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 70(C) and 70(D), the opening 394 communicates with the discharge port 319 passing through the game board 31 when the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position. As a result, when the stay box 39 is moved downward to the lower limit position, the game balls 99 in the stay box 39 are
4 and the discharge port 319 to the back side of the game board 31 . Also, the stay box 39
The bottom wall 392e of the bottom wall 392e is inclined such that its upper surface becomes lower toward the rear side. As a result, when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are communicated with each other, the game balls 99 in the retention box 39 are promoted to be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. be.

A special out ball sensor 35a is provided in the vicinity of the upper opening 391 on the left side wall 392c of the retention box 39. As shown in FIG. This special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39, and is, for example, a reflective optical sensor. Of course, as the special out-ball sensor 35a, other types of known sensors such as a transmissive optical sensor and an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor can also be used. Also, the special out ball sensor 35 a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the crew device 36 .

As shown in FIG. 71, the special out ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main controller 4, and the output from the special out ball sensor 35a is monitored by the MPU 41. It is determined whether or not the ball 99 has been entered. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the stay box 39, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command, and outputs this special out ball detection command by voice in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5 . On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the special out-ball detection command, the MPU 51 controls the motor 39a to execute the staying box lowering process for lowering the staying box 39 (FIGS. 76 and 77). reference). Further, when the stay box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the stay box 39 to the upper limit position after a certain period of time. The details of this point will be described later in the stay box restoration process of FIG.

Note that the special out ball sensor 35a may be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. FIG.
In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out-ball detection command,
The sound ramp control device 5 moves the stay box based on the output from the special out-ball sensor 35a.

Here, FIG. 72A is a front view showing an example of the special main display section 37a, and FIG. 72B is a diagram showing a display example of the special main display section 37a.

As shown in FIG. 72(A), the special main display section 37a is composed of a so-called 7-segment display, consisting of 7 segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. Figure 72 (B
), the special main display section 37a displays game setting values stored in the RAM 412 of the main controller 4. As shown in FIG. The special main display section 37a displays the RA
A game setting value stored in M412 is read out, and a numerical value corresponding to the game setting value is displayed. Specifically, when the game setting value is 1, the number 1 is displayed by lighting segments B and C, and when the game setting value is 2, the segment A is displayed on the special main display portion 37a. , B, D, E and G are turned on to display the number 2, and when the game set value is 3, the number 3 is displayed by turning on the segments A to D and G, and the game is played. When the set value is 4, segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, and when the game set value is 5, segments A, C, D, F and G are lit. When the game set value is 6, the number 6 is displayed by turning on the segments A and C to G.

In the special main display section 37a, after the game set values are displayed in the initialization process or the activation process, the game set values are continuously displayed until the main power is turned off. Further, when the game setting value is changed, the changed game setting value is displayed on the special main display section 37a. For example, when the changed game set values are displayed on the game set value display unit 45 in step S1709 of the game set value change processing in FIG. be done. Moreover, the special main display portion 37a has at least one
Any display other than a 7-segment display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display may be used as long as it can display numbers from 1 to 6.

Here, FIGS. 73A to 73C, FIGS. 74A and 74B are diagrams schematically showing the visible state of the special main display section 37a at each downward movement level. Note that these drawings show only the portion of the stay box 39 located in front of the special main display section 37a.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the lowering levels of the retention box 39 are lowering levels 0 to 4.
5 steps. Also, the higher the downward movement level of the stay box 39 (the larger the number of the downward movement level), the lower the stay box 39 is positioned, and the larger the area where the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73A, at the downward movement level 0, the retention box 39 is at the upper limit position, and the front side of the special main display section 37a is entirely covered with the retention box 39, and the special main display section 37a is displayed. The entire display portion 37a cannot be visually recognized. In other words, at the lower movement level 0, the game set values cannot be judged at all.

As shown in FIG. 73B, at downward movement level 1, a portion (upper half) of segment A of the special main display portion 37a is visible. That is, at downward movement level 1, lighting and extinguishing of segment A can be confirmed. At the downward movement level 1, it can be determined that the game set value is one of 2, 3, 5 and 6 when the segment A is lit, and the game set value is determined when the segment A is not lit. It can be determined to be either 1 or 4. In other words, at the downward movement level 1, it can be determined which of the game set values 1 and 4 and which of the game set values 2, 3, 5 and 6 by lighting or extinguishing of the segment A. .

As shown in FIG. 73(C), at downward movement level 2, all of segment A of the special main display portion 37a is visible, and a portion of segments B and F (upper half) is visible. That is, at downward movement level 2, in addition to lighting and extinguishing of segment A, lighting and extinguishing of segments B and F can be confirmed. At the downward movement level 2, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1 when the segment B is lit and the segments A and F are unlit, and when the segments B and F are lit and the segment A is unlit. It can be determined that the game set value is 4 at the beginning. Also, when the segments A and B are lit and the segment F is unlit, the game set value is 2 or 3.
, and it can be determined that the game set value is 5 or 6 when the segments A and F are lit and the segment B is unlit. In other words, at the downward movement level 2, the game set value is 1, the game set value is 4, or the game set value is 2 and 3 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B and F. or the game set value 5
and 6 can be determined.

As shown in FIG. 74A, at downward movement level 3, all segments A, B, and F of the special main display portion 37a are visible, and a portion (upper half) of segment G is visible. be. That is, at downward movement level 3, in addition to lighting and extinguishing of segments A, B, and F, lighting and extinguishing of segment G can be confirmed. At downward movement level 3, it can be determined that the game set value is 1 when the segment B is lit and the segments A, F and G are extinguished, and the segments B, F and G are lit and the segment A is extinguished. If so, it can be determined that the game set value is 4. Further, when the segments A, B and G are lit and the segment F is extinguished, it can be determined that the game set value is either 2 or 3, and the segments A, F and G are lit and the segment B is extinguished. It can be determined that the game set value is 5 or 6 when In other words, at the downward movement level 3, the game set value is 1, the game set value is 4, or the game set value is 2 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B, F and G. and 3, or game setting values 5 and 6.

As shown in FIG. 74(B), at downward movement level 5, the retention box 39 is at the lower limit position,
All seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible. That is, at the downward movement level 0, the game set values can be clearly confirmed.

Here, FIG. 74(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of staying game balls in the staying box 39 and the downward movement level of the staying box 39 . As shown in FIG. 74(C), the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is determined according to the number of game balls staying in the staying box 39 (the number of staying game balls). Specifically, the lowering level of the staying box 39 is 0 when the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position when the number of staying game balls is 0, and is 1 when the number of staying game balls is 1. It is 2 when the number of staying game balls is 2, 3 when the number of staying game balls is 3, and 4 when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position when the number of staying game balls is 4. In addition, as described above, the residence box 39
is at the lower limit position, the game balls staying in the staying box 39 are discharged to the outside, so the number of staying game balls in the staying box 39 becomes 0. In this case, the staying box 39 is moved to the lower limit position. After a certain period of time, the retention box 39 is moved to the upper limit position.

Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 when the retention box 39 moves downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position and returns from the lower limit position to the upper limit position will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. do.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. In the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, as in the secondary timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 27), operation detection processing (step S2001)
, operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2002), counter update processing (step S2002).
003), command determination processing (step S3301), variation game effect processing (step S2
005), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination processing (step S3301) of this embodiment differs from the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 31) in some steps. Further, in the secondary timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, unlike the secondary timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 27), staying box return processing is executed (step S3302).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. (No in steps S2302, S2307 and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3401). The special out ball detection command is a command set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the retention box 39 as described above. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301.

If the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S
3401: Yes), the staying box lowering process is executed (step S3402).

[Retention Box Lowering Process]
In the staying box lowering process, a process of lowering the staying box 39 to a position corresponding to the lowering level (see FIG. 74(C)) corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the staying box 39 is executed. Here, FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter added in step S3505 described later is zero. Here, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3502, and when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No), the process to step S3504.

<Step S3502>
When the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51
sets the stay box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the stay box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning the stay box 39 to the upper limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 0 when the stay box 39 is moved downward. is referred to in step S3603. The value of the stay box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the stay box 39 starts moving downward until it returns to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0). be done.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets the stay box return standby flag to ON. Here, the stay box return standby flag is a flag indicating that the stay box 39 is waiting for return to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) when it is moved downward, and the stay box in FIG. It is referred to in step S3601 in the return processing.

<Step S3504>
At step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter is four. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stay box 39 has been lowered to the lower limit position, and determines whether to move the stay box 39 further downward. If the value of the lowering level counter is 4 (step S3504: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the stay box lowering process, and if the value of the lowering level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), or if the stay box return standby flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 changes the value of the downward movement level counter shown at the position of the stay box 39 to 1 is added (step S3505), and the retention box 39 is moved downward to a position corresponding to the downward movement level corresponding to the value of the downward movement level counter after addition (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 has a motor 39a (see FIG. 71)
By controlling the drive pulse to be input to , the retention box 39 is moved downward to a position corresponding to the downward movement level one level higher than the downward movement level before receiving the special out ball detection command. For example, when the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the retention box 39 moves from the upper limit position covering the entire front surface of the special main display section 37a (see FIG. 73A) to the special main display section 37a. is lowered to a position where the upper half of segment A of is exposed (see FIG. 73(B)). When the lowering level is changed from 1 to 2, the retention box 39 is lowered from the position shown in FIG. 73(B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73(C) to the position shown in FIG. 74(A), and when the downward movement level is changed from 3 to 4, FIG. 74(B) to the lower limit position shown in FIG. When the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the special main display section 3
When the segment A of 7a is illuminated, it can be assumed that the game set value is any one of 2, 3, 5 and 6, and when the segment A is not lit, the game set value is either 1 or 4. It can be inferred that Then, when the lowering level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of estimated game setting values is gradually reduced by lighting or extinguishing of the segments that become visible according to the lowering level. The setting value can be narrowed down gradually. At the downward movement level 4, all of the seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible, so that the game set values can be recognized. As a result, the player guesses the game set value step by step according to the number of special out balls (the number of visually recognizable segments of the special main display portion 37a), and the greater the number of special out balls, the higher the accuracy of the guess. Since it becomes possible to improve step by step, it is possible to enjoy the process of guessing the game set value.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a part or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the stay box 39 downward. state can be realized.

In addition, since the retention box 39 is moved down step by step each time a game ball enters the special out ball opening 363, the visible area of the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually expanded. be done. As a result, the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a become gradually clear, so that the player can enjoy guessing the game setting values until the game setting values become comprehensible. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game setting value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Stay Box Recovery Process]
In the stay box return process, a process of returning the stay box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is executed after a certain period of time has passed since the stay box 39 was moved down to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stay box return standby flag, which is set to on in step S3505 in the stay box lowering process of FIG. 77, is set to on. If the stay box return wait flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602, and if the stay box return wait flag is set to OFF (step S3601:
No), the stay box recovery process ends.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
If the stay box return standby flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes
s), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the stay box return counter set in step S3504 in the stay box lowering process of FIG. 77 (step S3602), and the value of the stay box return counter after subtraction is 0. (step S3603). Namely
The MPU 51 determines whether or not a certain period of time has elapsed since the retention box 39 was moved downward to the lower limit position. If the value of the stay box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604, and if the value of the stay box return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No). ), and the stay box return processing ends.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
If the value of the stay box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes
), the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position by controlling the drive pulse input to the motor 39a (step S3604). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is displayed is restricted to a certain period of time, so that it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left visible for a long time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game set values from being grasped by a player who is not playing the game. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the stay box return standby flag to off (step S3606), and ends the stay box return process.

By the way, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, the game set values are suggested or specified by the symbol display section 341 and the sub-image display section 38 . However, in the above-described first embodiment, game setting values are suggested or specified as part of the presentation, so the game playability is poor. especially,
In the jackpot game, although the jackpot game performance is executed in the pattern display part 341 or the like, if the player is not interested in the jackpot game performance, the jackpot game is to digest the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type. , Poor playability.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at the time of right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game, the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the croon device 36, which is difficult to enter, and stays in stages. The box 39 moves downward, and the game set values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the croon device 36 enters the special out ball opening 363 at the time of hitting to the right such as a jackpot game. Also, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363, the special main display section 37
Since the game set values displayed in a are gradually revealed, the player can enjoy guessing the game set values in the process. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game setting value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the crew device 36 (detection of the game ball 99 in the stay box 39), and the stay box 39 moves from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. However, the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 may cause the retention box 39 to move downward at once from the upper limit position to the lower limit position.
In this way, when the game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 363, the retention box 39 moves from the upper limit position where the game setting values are invisible or difficult to see to the lower limit position where the entire game setting values are visible. be moved. Therefore, when a game ball is entered into the special out ball opening 363, the game setting value can be visually recognized immediately, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Also, each time one game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 363, the retention box 39 moves downward.
may be lowered step by step or all at once. Further, the retention box 39 can be moved downward to expand the visible area, but it may be moved upward to enlarge the visible area, or it may be moved leftward, rightward, diagonally, or the like. By doing so, the visible area may be enlarged.

Further, the staying box 39 may be moved downward by the weight of the game balls 99 staying in the staying box 39 . In this case, for example, the retention box 39 may be urged upward by urging means (viewing state control means) such as a coil spring. By doing so, the stay box 39 is lowered in stages according to the number of game balls staying inside, and the stay box 39
game balls are discharged, the retention box 39 can be moved upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball 99 hit to the right side area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball opening 363, the retention box 39 is moved downward, and the special main display portion 37a is displayed. The displayed game setting value is made visible, but when the game ball 99 hit to the left side area of the game board 31 enters the special out ball opening 363, the retention box 39 is moved. The game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a may be made visible. In this case, the special main display portion 37 a , the crew device 36 , the stay box 39 and the like are arranged in the left area or central area of the game board 31 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls 99 are distributed to the normal ball entrance 367 or the special out ball opening 363 by the crew device 36, but a distribution device having another configuration can also be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to visually recognize the game set values displayed on the special main display portion 37a when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 363. By satisfying the condition, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a may be made visible. As other specific conditions, for example, the number of jackpot lotteries reaches a predetermined number of times,
The lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined number of times in a row, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot a predetermined number of times, the total number of game balls launched exceeds a certain number, and the difference ball is a predetermined number. It can be mentioned that it becomes positive more than the number, and the difference ball becomes negative more than a predetermined number.
By making at least part of the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a visible when the exemplified specific condition is satisfied, the player can visually recognize at least part of the game setting values. It is possible to anticipate the timing of As a result, the player can advance the game while anticipating the timing at which the game setting values are displayed and looking forward to the arrival of that timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, when the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a are made visible by satisfying other conditions, an opaque plate-like member is displayed on the special main display section 37 instead of the stay box 39.
a and the lower or upper position of the special main display portion 37a, the game set values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be made visible or invisible. You may make it change a state.

Further, the special main display portion 37a may clearly indicate the ball payout performance other than the game set value. For example, the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value on the special main display section 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc., can be used to determine at least one winning opening such as the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the base, the continuous role ratio, the role ratio, etc. You may make it specify the base payout performance. In this case, it is conceivable to classify the above-mentioned other ball-out performances into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, FIGS. 37 and 38) and clearly indicate the ranks. In this way, in addition to the game set value, the ball payout performance other than the game set value is displayed on the special main display section 37a as an index indicating the ball payout performance, thereby making it possible to When specific conditions such as ball entry are satisfied, it becomes possible to estimate or grasp other ball output performances in addition to game set values. As a result, the playability is improved, and it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

In this embodiment, the special main display section 37 controlled by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4
Although the case where the game set value is displayed in a has been described, the game set value may be displayed on the display by the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. In this case, a liquid crystal display,
An organic EL display, a dot matrix display, or the like can be used. Then, it is conceivable to display the game set values step by step or all at once on the display that satisfies a specific condition.

In this embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game set values, other performance information such as part or all of the performance information indicating the ball-out performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the special main display section 37a. can be By displaying the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 on the special main display section 37a, the player can see the difference between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences at the time of manufacture of the gaming machine 10 and changes over time. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball output performance that reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning holes 313 to 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning ports 313 to 316, and when the ball payout performance based on the prize winning ports 313 to 316 can be grasped, the game being played is based on the performance information. An opportunity is provided to decide whether to continue playing on machine 10 .

Here, the performance information indicating the performance of winning balls 313 to 316 includes unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like.

Since the number of unit jackpot lotteries is an index that indicates the ease of receiving a jackpot lottery in the normal game state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode), part or all of the unit jackpot lottery number information is a special main By being displayed on the display section 37a, it is possible to know how easy it is to receive a big winning lottery. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the unit jackpot lottery frequency, and when the unit jackpot lottery frequency can be grasped, based on the unit jackpot lottery frequency, it is determined whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game. given the opportunity to do so.

Since the base information is an index indicating the ease of winning the first prize winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, by displaying part or all of the base information on the special main display section 37a, the first It is possible to know how easy it is to win a prize in the prize winning port 314 and the general prize winning port 313 . As a result, the player enjoys guessing the base, and if the base can be grasped, the player is provided with an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the base.

The continuous accessory ratio information is the frequency with which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (remaining ratio of the jackpot gaming state), and the ease of winning the variable winning port 316 (
It is an index showing the payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the lottery result of the big win lottery shifts to the big win game state. It is possible to know the frequency of winning prizes and the ease of winning prizes to the variable prize winning port 316 . As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

Accessory ratio information is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay rate in jackpot gaming state), stay rate in high-frequency support mode receiving support from electric accessory 315b, and variable It is an index that indicates the ease of winning a prize to the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (ball output rate in the jackpot game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the character ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the character ratio.
The frequency that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state, electric accessory 3
It is possible to know the rate of staying in the high frequency support mode that receives the support of 15b and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 . As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, game setting values are displayed in the special main display section 37a,
A case has been described where the game setting values are made visible by downward movement of the retention box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a translucent monitor is placed in front of the special main display section where the game set values are displayed, and the game set values are displayed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor. is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that the visibility of is changed.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing an example of a crunoon device and its periphery of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view along the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of a display section 37a and a translucent monitor 39A; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, similar to the above-described fifth embodiment, a crun device 36, an ejection port 319, and a special main display section 37a. However, in this embodiment, the residence box 39 in the fifth embodiment is not provided, and instead of the residence box 39, a translucent monitor 39A (translucent display device) is provided. there is

The cloon device 36 has the same configuration as the cloon device 36 of the fifth embodiment, but a guide member 370 is connected to the special out ball passage 364 . This guide member 370 is
It guides the game ball 99 introduced into the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the game board 31 and is also connected to the discharge port 319 .

The translucent monitor 39A has a low transmittance state (light shielding state) in which the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is low and the back side is invisible or difficult to see, and a low transmittance state (light shielding state) in which the visible light transmittance of the entire monitor is high and the back side is visible. It is possible to vary the visible light transmittance between a possible high transmittance state (transparent state). The translucent monitor 39A is in a light-shielded state by displaying a single color such as black or white. Further, the translucent monitor 39A can realize a translucent state, which is a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light blocking state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is, for example, a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display capable of realizing a transparent state. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance at . 81 (
As shown in A), the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly arranged in front of the special main display section 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance of the light-transmitting monitor 39A, it is possible to select whether the display contents of the special main display section 37a are visible or invisible, or visible. The degree of visibility (visibility level) in a visible state can be adjusted.

Here, FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visibility state of the special main display portion 37a. The visibility level is an index indicating the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A, and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

As shown in FIG. 81(B), the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is five levels of 0-4. Also, the higher the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A (the higher the visibility level number), the higher the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A, and the higher the visibility of the special main display section 37a. At the visual recognition level 0, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low and the background behind the translucent monitor 39A cannot be visually recognized, so the contents displayed on the special main display section 37a cannot be confirmed at all. On the other hand, at visual recognition level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the back of the translucent monitor 39A can be completely visually recognized.
You can check the display contents in .

Here, FIG. 81(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the special out ball count number and the visibility level of the translucent monitor. The special out ball count number is the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 363 of the crew device 36 . This special out ball count number is
It is counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a, and is cleared to 0 when the count reaches 4.

As shown in FIG. 81(C), the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined according to the number of special out balls counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a. Specifically, the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0, which means that the area behind the translucent monitor 39A is invisible or difficult to see when the special out ball count is 0, and the special out ball count is 0. It is 1 when the number of special out balls is 1, 2 when the number of special out balls is 2, 3 when the number of special out balls is 3, and 4 when the number of special out balls is 4. Behind translucent monitor 39A is 4 which is fully visible.

In addition, when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A becomes 4 where the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, the next game ball 99 is visually recognized without waiting for the entry of the next game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363. After a certain period of time after the level becomes 4, the area behind the translucent monitor 39A becomes 0, which is invisible or difficult to see.

Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when changing the visibility level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85. FIG.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. In the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, similar to the secondary timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 75), operation detection processing (step S2001)
, operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2002), counter update processing (step S2002).
003), command determination processing (step S3701), variable game effect processing (step S2
005), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination processing (step S3301) of this embodiment differs from the command determination processing (see FIG. 31) of the fifth embodiment described above in some steps. In addition, in the secondary timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, instead of the staying box return processing of the secondary timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 75), light shielding control processing is executed (step S3702). ).

[Command judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination process of the present embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. (No in steps S2302, S2307 and S2310), it is determined whether or not the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3801). The special out ball detection command is a game ball 99 to the special out ball mouth 363 by the special out ball sensor 35a.
This command is set when it is detected that a ball has been hit, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

If the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S
3801: Yes), visual recognition control processing is executed (step S3802).

[Visual recognition control processing]
In the visibility control process, the visibility level according to the special out ball count number (see FIG. 81(C))
A process for controlling the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is executed so that here,
FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of a visual recognition control process procedure executed in the command determination process of FIG. 83 .

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
As shown in FIG. 84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out-ball counter (step S3901), and according to the visibility level corresponding to the value of the special out-ball counter after the addition, the translucent monitor 39A is visible. Light transmittance is controlled (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level one level higher than the visibility level before receiving the special out-ball detection command by controlling the voltage value applied to the translucent monitor 39A. (See FIG. 81(B)).

<Step S3903>
At step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the special out ball counter is 4 or not. That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A to that of the translucent monitor 3
Determine whether or not the maximum transparency is such that the back of 9A can be fully visually recognized. When the value of the visibility level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S
3904, if the value of the visibility level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No
), the visual recognition control process ends.

<Step S3904>
If the value of the visibility level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51
sets a light blocking start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). Here, the light shielding start counter is calculated from the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 4 (transparent state) at which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible to the completely invisible or This is a counter for determining the timing of changing the visible light transmittance to correspond to visibility level 0 (light shielding state), which is difficult to visually recognize, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light shielding control process in FIG. 85, which will be described later. The value of the light shielding start counter is set to a value corresponding to a certain time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4 to when it returns to the visibility level 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the light blocking start standby flag to ON, and terminates the visual recognition control process. Here, the light shielding start waiting flag is a flag indicating that it is waiting for changing the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light shielding process in FIG. 85 described later. be.

[Light shielding control process]
In the light shielding control process, a process of setting the visibility level to 0 after a certain period of time has elapsed since the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A was set to 4 is executed. Here, FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the light shielding control process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the light shielding start standby flag, which is set to on in step S3905 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. 84 described later, is set to on. If the light blocking start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4002, and if the light blocking start standby flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), Terminates the staying box recovery process.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the light blocking start standby flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), M
PU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the light shielding start counter set in step S3904 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. step S4003). In other words, the MPU 51 operates on the translucent monitor 39A.
It is determined whether or not a certain period of time has elapsed since the visual recognition level of was set to 4. When the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4004, and when the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4003: Yes).
4003: No), the light shielding control process ends.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
If the value of the light blocking start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), MP
U51 controls the level of the voltage value applied to the translucent monitor 39A to set the translucent monitor 39A to a visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 0, which is the light shielding state (step S4).
004). As a result, the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is completely visually recognized is restricted to a certain period of time, so that it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left visible for a long time. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out ball counter to 0 (step S
4005), the light shielding start waiting flag is set to OFF (step S4006), and the stay box return processing ends.

By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, at the time of right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game, the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 363 of the crewe device 36, which is difficult to enter, in stages. The retention box 39 moves downward, and the game set values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be gradually confirmed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment, instead of the staying box 39 in the fifth embodiment, a translucent monitor 39 is provided on the front side of the special main display section on which game setting values are displayed.
A is arranged, and the visibility of the game set value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A. In addition, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole is gradually increased by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 of the crew device 36, which is difficult to enter, during right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game. is changed to Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the croon device 36 enters the special out ball opening 363 at the time of hitting to the right in a jackpot game or the like. . In addition, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball 363, the game set values displayed on the special main display portion 37a are gradually revealed, and in the process, the game set values are guessed and enjoyed. be able to. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game setting value can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the visual recognition level is adjusted by adjusting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole. It is also conceivable to adjust the visibility level by adjusting the display color of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole.

It is also conceivable to adjust the visibility level stepwise from the light shielding state to the transparent state by partially changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. For example, in FIG.
A) to FIG. 86(D), from a state (light-shielding state) in which the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A is low, a transparent region having a high visible light transmittance is gradually increased. Ultimately, the entire translucent monitor 39A can be made transparent.

The example of FIG. 86(A) is a pattern in which the transparent area increases stepwise from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of FIG. 86(B) is the pattern of FIG. 86(A). Contrary to the pattern, it is a pattern in which the transparent area increases stepwise from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A. The example of FIG. 86(C) is a pattern in which the transparent area increases stepwise from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A. A pattern in which the transparent area gradually increases from the left side to the right side is also conceivable. Also, FIG.
The example of (D) is a pattern in which the transparent area gradually increases from the upper left corner side of the translucent monitor 39A toward the lower right corner side on the diagonal side. A pattern in which the transparent area gradually increases from the other corner side of 39A toward the diagonal corner side is also conceivable.
In this way, even when the transparent area is increased step by step by the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 363, the game set values displayed on the special main display section 37a are gradually revealed. In the process, the game set values can be guessed and enjoyed. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the game set value can be grasped can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

Further, by increasing the visible light transmittance as a whole while giving gradation to the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A, it is also possible to change the visibility level between the light blocking state and the transparent state. Conceivable.

Further, in this embodiment, while the light-transmitting monitor 39A is changed from the light-blocking state to the transparent state, each time a specific condition is satisfied, a plurality of regions set in advance may be made transparent regions in a predetermined order. Conceivable. For example, as shown in FIG. 87(A), the plurality of areas may be set in portions corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a.
Specifically, the regions A to G where the central portions of the segments A to G can be transparent regions
, and one of the regions A to G becomes a transparent region each time a specific condition is satisfied, thereby making it possible to determine whether or not each segment is lit. Here, FIG. 87B is an example of changing the areas A to G to transparent areas in this order each time a specific condition is satisfied. In this way, by making the areas A to G transparent areas while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state, it is possible to guess the game set value in stages.

The order in which the regions A to G are made transparent is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 87(B), and may be set as appropriate. It may be determined according to other factors (for example, ball output performance such as a base other than the game set value), or may be determined by lottery. Moreover, when a specific condition is satisfied, not only one of the regions A to G but also two or more regions may be set as transparent regions. Further, it is not necessary to make all of the areas A to G transparent while the translucent monitor 39A is changed from the light blocking state to the transparent state, and it is conceivable to make some of the areas sequentially transparent. In this case, the order in which the partial areas are made transparent may also be appropriately determined in accordance with the game setting values and the like, as in the case described above. Further, the plurality of areas are the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a.
It is not limited to areas A to G corresponding to , and may be set on the front side of portions other than the respective segments A to G. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of stages until the game set values are grasped, and it is possible to enjoy which of the areas A to G and the other areas will be the transparent area when a specific condition is met.

Further, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is changed in stages from the light shielding state to the transparent state, but it may be changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state at once.

Also in this embodiment, the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game set value on the special main display section 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc., determine the number of unit jackpot lotteries, the base, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, etc. You may make it specify the ball-out performance based on at least 1 prize-winning hole.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, game setting values are displayed in the special main display section 37a,
When the stay box 39 arranged on the front side of the special main display portion 37a is at the upper limit position, the game set value is made invisible or difficult to see, and the stay box 39 is lowered step by step from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. Thus, the case where part or all of the game setting values are made visible has been described. Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the downward movement of the retention box 39 was started.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the operation check of the stay box is executed after the main power is turned on and the stay box is driven during the jackpot game, a drive abnormality occurs in the stay box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit. It is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not there is a drive abnormality, and abnormality processing is executed when a drive abnormality occurs.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

Here, FIG. 88 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the game machine according to this embodiment, and FIG.
8 is a cross-sectional view along the X5-X5 cutting line, FIG. 90 is FIG. 8 when the forced ejection member is in the operating position
9, and FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of an area including a stay box and a special main display portion in the gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment has a basic configuration similar to that of the above-described fifth embodiment, but the special out ball opening 363 of the crew device 36 Then, the game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying in the retention box 39.例文帳に追加Therefore, stay box 3
It is undesirable for the game ball 99 to stay in the stay box 9 due to a failure of the motor 39a for driving the stay box 39 or a failure of the drive mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor 39a to the stay box 39. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being retained in the retention box 39 in a situation where there is a possibility that the 39 will not be moved down to the downward movement level 4.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the staying box 39 or staying in the special out ball passage 364 .

The game machine 10 includes a forced ejection member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B and a translucent monitor 39A. A notch 319A is provided on the rear side of the lower end of the special out ball passage 364 of the crun device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display portion 37a of the game board 31. The notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C define a space for discharging the special out ball passage 364 of the crew device 36 to the game board 31. Further, on the back side of the game board 31, a discharge path 319D is provided for guiding the game ball 99 that has passed through the forced discharge port 319C to a position where the out ball sensor 35 can detect it.

The forced discharge member 319B is movable in the front-rear direction D1 between a standby position (see FIG. 89) and an operating position (see FIG. 90) by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, at the standby position, the forced discharge member 319B does not exist between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the ball enters the special out ball opening 363 of the crew device 36, A game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the passage 364 can enter the staying box 39 . Normally, the forced ejection member 319B is at the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the operating position, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39, and the game balls 99 discharged from the special out ball passage 364 (special out ball ) can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and the entry of the special out ball into the retention box 39 is restricted. The forced discharge member 319B is moved to the operating position when there is an abnormality in the drive of the retention box 39. As shown in FIG. Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is discharged through the game board 31 through the notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C.
is forcibly ejected to the rear side of the

It should be noted that the forced ejection member 319B is not limited to a configuration capable of moving in the front-rear direction D1, and other configurations can be adopted. For example, the forced discharge member 319B is movable between a closed position that closes the forced discharge port 319C and a closed position that opens the forced discharge port 319C. Arrangements that exist between the passageway 364 and the retention box 39 are also conceivable.

Upper limit position detection sensor 40A and lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of retention box 39 . These upper limit position detection sensor 40A and lower limit position detection sensor 40B are, for example, optical sensors such as reflective sensors and illuminance sensors, and are connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. FIG. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be monitored by the MPU 51. FIG. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input/output I/F 42 of the main controller 4. In this case, a command corresponding to the output from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is sent from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5.
, the position of the retention box 39 is grasped in the audio lamp control device 5 .

As shown in FIGS. 91(A) to 91(C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display portion 37a, and when the stay box 39 is at the downward movement level 0, the upper limit position detection sensor 40A The presence of the stay box 39 can be detected, and the presence of the stay box 39 cannot be detected when the stay box 39 is at downward movement levels 1-4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge port 319, and can detect the existence of the retention box 39 when the retention box 39 is at the downward movement level 4, and the retention box 39 is at the downward movement level 0-3. In some cases, the existence of the stay box 39 cannot be detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A
When it is operating normally, it outputs a high level signal (H) when the lowering level is 0, and outputs a low level signal (L) when the lowering level is 1-4. Further, when the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is operating normally, a high level signal (H
) while outputting a low level signal (L) in the case of downward movement levels 0-3. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40
B is operating normally, the combination of the output levels of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL at downward movement level 0, LL at downward movement levels 1 to 3, and LL at downward movement level 4 becomes LH.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the translucent monitor 39A is arranged on the front side of the special main display section 37a, and controls the visibility of numbers corresponding to game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a. do. The translucent monitor 39A is similar to the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment, and is controlled by the MPU 51 to change the visible light transmittance. As a result, the special main display section 37a has a state in which the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the display content is visible, and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is low so that the display content is not visible. Or visibility is controlled to and from difficult conditions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(C), translucent monitor 39A displays special main display section 37 when stay box 39 is normally driven.
The display content of a is in a normal state in which the display content is visible, and when a drive abnormality occurs in the retention box 39, the display content in the special main display section 37a is in a visibility restricted state in which it is impossible or difficult to see.

Here, when the retention box 39 is not driven normally, the downward movement level grasped by the value of the downward movement level counter, the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40
It means that there is a discrepancy with the downward movement level grasped by B. For example, if the retention box 39 does not move up and down due to a problem with the motor 39a or the drive mechanism, and if the retention box 39 moves up and down but there is a difference between the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensors 40A and 40B, , when the retention box 39 is not driven normally. In this embodiment, as will be described below, during the start-up process and the jackpot game executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the sound lamp control device 5 checks the operation of the stay box. is executed. In addition, the operation check of the staying box 39 is performed in addition to the start-up process and the jackpot game. If it is executed, it is executed at a timing that does not make the player feel uncomfortable even if the staying box 39 is moved, such as when an RTC (real time clock) effect is being executed in the symbol display diagram 341 or the like at a predetermined time. You may

In place of the translucent monitor 39A, other means may be used to make the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see. for example,
The special main display section 37a may be hidden by a movable member different from the retention box 39,
The special main display section 37a is configured to be movable, and the special main display section 37a is connected to the stay box 3.
9, the special main display section 37a may be retracted to a position that is invisible or difficult to see. It is also conceivable to turn off the power of the special main display section 37a so that the game set values cannot be grasped. Alternatively, instead of using the translucent monitor 39A, it is conceivable to make the special main display section 37a invisible or difficult to see by optical action. For example, by arranging an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusing member on the front side of the special main display section 37a and introducing light from the light source into the optical member, the special main display section 37
It is also conceivable to make a invisible or difficult. On the contrary, the special main display section 37a is made visible by turning on the light source and illuminating the optical member with the light from the light source, while turning off the light source makes the special main display section 37a invisible. Or it can be considered difficult.

[Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. The processing in the audio ramp control device 5 in this embodiment is basically the same as in the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, processing for checking the driving state of the stay box 39 is executed. Specifically, for example, when the stay box operation check process is executed in the startup process executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the stay box 39 is moved down in the stay box lowering process, and When the stay box 39 is moved upward in the stay box return process, an operation check is performed to see if there is any abnormality in the driving state of the stay box 39 .

[Retention box operation check process]
In the stay box operation check process, the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40A are used to check whether the stay box 39 is operating normally on the condition that the stay box 39 is operating normally. It is checked using the position detection sensor 40B. That is, the stay box operation check process is executed after an operation check to see if there is any abnormality in the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. In addition, the operation check of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is performed, for example, by blinking a light source for operation check arranged in the vicinity of each of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, or by are moved, and the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time are used. Here, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the stay box operation check process executed in the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the retention box 39 to downward level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and after a predetermined period of time (step S4102: Yes
), and the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position (step S4103). Here, the reason why the stay box 39 is moved to the lower limit position and then returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined period of time is that the game balls 99 may remain in the stay box 39 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is because there is a nature. In other words, for example, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0 to 3 while the game balls 99 remain in the staying box 39. be. Therefore, by moving the stay box 39 to the lower limit position and then returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined period of time, it is possible to achieve a state in which there are no game balls 99 inside the stay box 39, and the stay box 39 is lowered to level 0. can be made to wait at the upper limit position. Further, the predetermined time for stopping the stay box 39 at the lower limit position which is the downward movement level 4 is set to the time required to discharge the game balls 99 staying in the stay box 39, for example, about 2 to 10 seconds. be.

Then, when the retention box 39 is returned to the lower movement level 0 (step S4103), the MPU 51 sets the value of the lower movement level counter to 0 (step S4104), and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are set. , and the combination of the output levels of these detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored as one for downward movement level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 moves the stay box 39 step by step to the lowering levels 1 to 4 (step S4106) until the stay box 39 is lowered to the lowering level 4 (step S4109: Yes). The value of the downward movement level counter is set to 1 each time the
is added (step S4107), and the detection sensors 40A, 4
The 0B output level combination is stored (step S4108).

<Steps S4110 to S4116>
The MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the output levels is the combination when the values of the downward movement level counter are all 0 to 4 and the retention box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92(B)). (steps S4110 to 4114). Then, if the values of the downward movement level counter are all 0 to 4 and the combination of output levels corresponds to the combination in the case of normal operation (Yes in all of steps S4110 to S4114), the retention box 39 is normally driven, the retention box 39 is returned to the upper limit position, which is the downward movement level 0 (step S4115), the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4116), and the End the box operation check process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 51 does not correspond to the combination of the output levels in which the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 (step S41
If any of 10 to 4114 is No), it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the driving state of the stay box 39, so error processing is executed (step S4117), and the stay box operation check process ends. Here, if there is an abnormality in the drive state of the retention box 39, the cause may be, for example, an abnormality in the motor 39a or drive system for moving the retention box 39 up or down, or if the motor 39a or drive system is normal, Dynamic level counter value and detection sensor 40A, 4
A mismatch with the downward movement level sensed at 0B is conceivable. Error handling will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[Error handling]
In the error process, an error process is executed according to the abnormal state of the drive state of the stay box 39 . Here, FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the error processing procedure executed in the stay box operation check process of FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH when the values of the downward movement level counter are all 0 to 4 (step S4).
201). That is, the MPU 51 detects the detection sensor 40A regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter.
, 40B is always LH. The MPU 51 determines that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is L when the values of the downward movement level counter are all 0 to 4.
If it is H (step S4201: Yes), regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter, the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LH, and the retention box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position of downward movement level 4. Since it is determined that there is a drive abnormality that does not cause movement, the process proceeds to the first drive abnormality process in step S4202. On the other hand, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4203 when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No).

<Step S4202>
The MPU 51 detects the detection sensors 40A and 40B for all of the lower movement level counter values 0 to 4.
is LH (step S4201: Yes), the first drive abnormality process is executed (step S4202), and the error process ends. Here, when there is a drive abnormality in which the stay box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position corresponding to downward movement level 4 and does not move, the display contents of the special main display section 37a are always visible. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 causes the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display section 37a to change from the normal state in which the display content on the special main display section 37a is visible to the special main display. The display content in the part 37a is switched to the visibility restricted state in which it is invisible or difficult (FIG. 9).
2(C)). As a result, even when the stay box 39 does not move from the lower limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 4, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display contents (game set values) on the special main display section 37a. Therefore, when the retention box 39 does not move at the lower limit position which is the lower movement level 4, the game ball 99 does not enter the special out ball mouth 363 of the crew device 36, but the special main display section It is possible to prevent the game setting value from being recognized by the player because the display contents at 37a are always visible.

Further, the MPU 51 may notify that the stay box 39 does not move in the first drive abnormality process. In this case, for example, an image indicating that the stay box 39 is abnormally driven is displayed on the pattern display section 341, and a sound indicating that the stay box 39 is abnormally driven is output from the speaker 26. By doing so, it is conceivable to notify that the staying box 39 has a drive abnormality. As a result, the game hall side can know that the staying box 39 has a drive abnormality.

On the condition that there is no abnormality in the elements other than the staying box 39, the game hall side makes the player select whether to shift to a customer waiting state in which the player can play or disable the player from playing. It is also conceivable to For example, in addition to an image indicating that the staying box 39 is abnormally driven, an image for selecting whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state is displayed on the pattern display unit 341. It is possible to select whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side by means of an operation button 20 or a cross key (not shown) provided in the game hall. As a result, when there is no abnormality other than the driving abnormality of the retention box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the judgment of whether or not to allow the player to use the gaming machine 10 to the gaming hall side. be possible.

Then, when the game hall side selects the customer waiting state, the technique of the sixth embodiment is applied, and the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 363 of the crew device 36 (the number of special out balls)
By selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A according to the special main display section 37a
You may make it change the visibility of the display content of. For example, a sensor such as a proximity sensor for detecting the game ball 99 is provided in the vicinity of the forced discharge port 319C. You may make it change the visibility of 37a. In this case, even if the stay box 39 does not move at the lower limit position of downward movement level 4, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a playability in which the game set value can be estimated or recognized. Also, in the case where the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display section 37a are made invisible or difficult to see by other means instead of the translucent monitor 39A, the special The visibility of the main display section 37a may be changed.

<Step S4203>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B with any of the downward movement level counter values of 0 to 4 is not LH (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 detects all of the downward movement level counter values of 0 to 4. It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at 1 is HL (step S4203). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 detects the detection sensor 40 when the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4.
When the combination of outputs of A and 40B is HL (step S4203: Yes), the combination of outputs of detection sensors 40A and 40B is always H regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter.
L, and it is determined that the retention box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position, which is the downward movement level 0, and does not move. On the other hand, the MPU 51 determines that the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 is not HL (step S4203: No).
, the process proceeds to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B for all the values of the downward movement level counters of 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality processing (step S4204). , terminate the error processing. Here, if there is a drive abnormality where the stay box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of the lower movement level 0 and does not move, and the game ball 99 is introduced into the stay box 39, the game ball 99 in the stay box 39 cannot be discharged. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 moves the forced ejection member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90). As a result, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the retention box 39. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the crew device 36 in the jackpot game and is released from the discharge path 319D is forced to be discharged by the forced discharge member 319B.
Entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by . Then, the game ball 99 whose entry into the retention box 39 is restricted by the forced discharge member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the forced discharge member 319B, the forced discharge port 319C and the discharge path 319D. . As a result, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball mouth 363 is prevented from entering the staying box 39.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 exceeding the capacity from being retained in the retention box 39, prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39, and prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the retention box 39. It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring. Therefore, even if there is a driving abnormality in which the stay box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of downward movement level 0 and does not move, it is possible to execute the game in the gaming machine 10 as usual.

Further, in the second drive abnormality process, as in the case of the first drive process, it may be notified that the stay box 39 does not move. Also in this case, as in the case of the first driving process,
It may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side.

<Step S4205>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is neither LH nor HL when the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 (No in steps S4201 and S4203)
, and whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all of the lower movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LL regardless of the lowering levels 0-4. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 detects the detection sensors 40A and 40B regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. The output combination is always LL and the dwell box 39
is fixed at a position corresponding to one of downward movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move. On the other hand, if the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LL at any of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 determines the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the detection sensor Since it is determined that a link abnormality that differs from the downward movement level based on 40A and 40B has occurred, the process proceeds to link abnormality processing in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B with the value of the downward movement level counter being any one of 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes third drive abnormality processing (step S4206 ) to end the error processing. Here, if there is a drive abnormality in which the retention box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to one of the downward movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, part of the display contents of the special main display section 37a is always visible. In addition, when the game ball 99 is introduced into the stay box 39, the stay box 39
game ball 99 cannot be ejected. Therefore, in the third drive abnormality process, the MPU 51
executes the same process as the second drive abnormality process in addition to the process similar to the first drive abnormality process. Specifically, the MPU 51 changes the translucent monitor 39A arranged on the front side of the special main display section 37a from the normal state in which the display content on the special main display section 37a is visible to the special main display section 37a. While the display content is switched to an invisible or difficult visibility restricted state (Fig. 9
2(C)), and the forced discharge member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operating position (see FIG. 90).
reference). As a result, even if the stay box 39 does not move at any of the downward movement levels 1 to 3, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display contents (game set values) on the special main display portion 37a. Also, in the jackpot game, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the crew device 36 and is released from the discharge path 319D is played on the game board 3.
It is possible to prevent the game balls from staying in the staying box 39 by forcibly discharging the balls to the back side of the game ball 1.例文帳に追加

<Step S4207>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is any one of 0 to 4 is not LH, HL or LL (steps S4201, S4203 and S4
No in all of 205), and the MPU 51 executes link failure processing (step S4207).
, terminate the error processing. Here, the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter,
When a link abnormality occurs that is different from the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B (except when the stay box 39 does not move), the stay box 39 cannot be operated normally. Therefore, in the link abnormality process, the MPU 51 uses the detection sensors 40A, 40
The retention box 39 is moved to the lower level position based on the detection result at B. For example, when the combination of output levels from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the retention box 3
9 is moved to the upper limit position of downward movement level 0. In addition, when the process of matching the link between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, the stay box operation check process is executed again. , preferably to check if the links are consistent. If it is determined that the link is not consistent even after the second stay box operation check process, the stay box 39 may not be able to move to a part of the downward movement level. You may make it alert|report not to cancel. Also in this case, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the gaming hall side. Further, if the link abnormality is not resolved, the third drive abnormality process may be executed.

By the way, when the visibility of the special main display portion 37a is changed by moving the stay box 39 up and down, for example, it is assumed that the stay box 39 will malfunction due to an abnormality in the motor 39a connected to the stay box 39 or in the drive system. be done. In this case, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the lower movement level 0, the game balls inside the staying box 39 cannot be discharged. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 4, the game setting value is grasped because the entire special main display portion 37a remains visible. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at downward movement levels 1 to 3, the special main display section 37
Not only does part of a remain visible, but the game balls inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main power source of the game machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process is executed to determine whether or not the staying box 39 is abnormally driven. Then, when an abnormality occurs in driving the stay box 39, an abnormality process is executed according to the position (downward movement level) at which the drive of the stay box 39 is stopped. Specifically, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0, the forced discharge member 319B is operated to enable the forced discharge of the special out ball to the back side of the game board 31. Game ball 9 in retention box 39
9 is prevented from entering. Further, when the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered, thereby
a is invisible or difficult to see. When the movement of the retention box 39 is stopped at downward movement levels 1 to 3, the forced discharge member 319B is operated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the game balls inside the retention box 39 cannot be discharged, and prevent the special main display portion 37a from remaining visible in whole or in part. As a result, it is possible to execute a game on the gaming machine 10 even when the staying box 39 is abnormally driven.

[Retention Box Lowering Process]
In the staying box lowering process of this embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the lowering level corresponding to the number of game balls staying in the staying box 39 (see FIG. 74(C)). A process of lowering the stay box 39 is executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, the stay box 3
9 before lowering the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter, the detection sensor 40A,
Matching with the downward movement level based on 40B is confirmed, and the third drive abnormality processing is executed when matching is not achieved. Here, FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the stay box lowering process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first acquires a combination of output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). Then, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), and when the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL (step S4302: Yes), the MPU 51 performs the error processing described above. The third drive abnormality process to be executed is executed (step S4303). When the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), that is, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 1 to 3, the MPU 51 determines that the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is L.
If not L (step S4304: Yes), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4303). That is, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality process when the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter and the lowering level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match. In other words, the reason why the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter and the lowering level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B do not match is because the retention box does not move, or simply because they do not match. In addition, when the retention box 39 is not moved, it cannot be determined at which downward movement level the retention box 39 is stopped. Execute error processing.

It should be noted that the determination of whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B match is made by the retention box 3.
9, it may be performed after lowering the retention box 39, or may be performed both before and after lowering the retention box 39.

[Retention box recovery process]
In the stay box return process of this embodiment, the stay box 39 is at the lower limit position (downward movement level 4).
), a process of returning the retention box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is executed after a certain period of time has elapsed. Further, in this embodiment, before and after the retention box 39 is restored, the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter and the detection sensors 40A and 40
Matching with the downward movement level based on B is confirmed, and if not matching, the third drive abnormality processing is executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of staying box return processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the stay box return process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 performs the return operation when it is time to return the stay box 39 (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603).
, the combination of the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is acquired (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402). Namely
Immediately before returning the retention box 39 from the downward movement level 4 to the downward movement level 0, the MPU 51
It is determined whether or not the lowering level based on the value of the lowering level counter matches the lowering level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. Further, when the MPU 51 returns the retention box 39 to the downward movement level 0 (step S3604), the detection sensor 4
It is determined whether or not the combination of the output levels of 0A and 40B is HL (step S44).
03). Then, the MPU 51 sets the downward movement level based on the combination of the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at the timing of returning the stay box 39 or immediately after the stay box 39 is returned. If the level does not match (No in step S4402 or S4403), the third drive abnormality process is executed (step S4304).

It should be noted that the determination of whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B are consistent is made by the retention box 3.
It is not limited to both before and after the return (upward movement) of the storage box 9, but may be performed only before or after the retention box 39 is returned.

As described above, when the visibility of the special main display portion 37a is changed by moving the stay box 39 up and down, for example, a malfunction of the motor 39a connected to the stay box 39 or a drive system causes an abnormality in driving the stay box 39. is assumed. In this embodiment, the stay box 3 is checked by an operation check executed after the main power supply of the game machine 10 is turned on.
9 is judged whether or not there is a drive abnormality. Even if it is determined that there is no driving abnormality in this operation check, it is assumed that the staying box 39 will have a driving abnormality during the game.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the stay box 39 is moved downward and when the stay box 39 is returned (moved upward) during the game, it is determined whether or not the stay box 39 has a drive abnormality. drive abnormality processing is executed. As a result, the game can be continued even if a drive abnormality occurs in the staying box 39 during the game. In particular, since the stay box 39 is moved up and down in the jackpot game, it is significant to be able to continue the game when the stay box 39 is abnormally driven.

In this embodiment, design changes similar to those in the fifth embodiment are possible within the applicable range.

[Summary of Invention]
An outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added below. In addition, in order to understand the corresponding relationship between each additional note and each embodiment, reference numerals and the like may be attached for convenience of explanation, but the invention related to the additional note is limited to the specific configuration attached with the reference numeral. not a thing Moreover, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) serving as an indicator of ball payout performance;
performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
7a) and
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
41) and
visibility restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see;
Visualization state control means ( 51) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance of the gaming machine during play based on the visible part. In addition, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized, it is possible to comprehend the performance of the gaming machine during play. Therefore, by being able to estimate or grasp the ball output performance of the gaming machine during play, the playability is improved, and it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

[Appendix A2]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the change decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A2, the performance information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the information on the advantageous determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. Part or all of the information about the advantageous decision probability is displayed on the performance information display means, so that the player can enjoy guessing the advantageous decision probability, and if the advantageous decision probability can be grasped, the advantageous decision probability is displayed. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on.

[Appendix A3]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of game balls according to the winning hole type based on the entry of the game balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appendix A3 includes performance information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one winning hole among a plurality of winning holes. As a result, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning holes is displayed on the performance information display means. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings among the gaming machines. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, and if the ball payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether

[Appendix A4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. further comprising a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments performed by the transition judgment means (41) with the ball as a trigger,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of unit judgments calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by displaying part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments, the player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, so that the player can know the ease of receiving the transition judgment. Become. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix A5]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
With respect to the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31), the number of payout balls of game balls to the entry of game balls to the first prize winning port (314) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) further comprising a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of game balls to the number of putout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the ball payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing so. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball output rate, and if the ball output rate can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the ball output rate. Granted.

[Appendix A6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) Further comprising a continuous role ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous role ratio which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous role product ratio calculated by the continuous role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate)
is an indicator of Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (percentage of stays in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize in the variable prize winning opening. As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix A7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination according to 1), and a game ball can be entered by the support of the electric accessory, and the transition determination means (41) by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to perform transition determination, and a variable winning port (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the number of game balls entering the second winning hole (315); ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the role product ratio calculated by the role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the performance information includes information on the role product ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency (
stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state ball rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game ( stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix A8]
The visual recognition restriction means (39) controls the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized, and the performance information display means (37a).
) is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information displayed in
The visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) in a predetermined direction (downward) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A7 characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of moving the visibility restriction means in a predetermined direction.

[Appendix A9]
The visibility restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times,
The visibility state control means (51) controls the visibility restriction means (39) each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visibility restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position.
39) is moved step by step in the predetermined direction.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, since the visual recognition restricting means is moved step by step in a predetermined direction each time a specific condition is satisfied, the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. be. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clearer gradually, so that the user can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information can be comprehended.
As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be grasped can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A10]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) to at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position when the specific condition is satisfied.
) can be stopped, and
At the intermediate position, a part of the performance information is visible, and two or more of a plurality of contents (for example, game setting values 1 to 6) set as the same type of the performance information (for example, game setting values) (for example, game set values 2, 3, 5, and 6) are set at a position (for example, an intermediate position of lowering level 1) in which it is impossible or difficult to distinguish.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A10, when the visibility restricting means is moved in a predetermined direction due to the satisfaction of a specific condition, part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between two or more contents. is. Therefore, it is possible to narrow down the number of items from a plurality of items and make a guess before the content of the performance information becomes recognizable when a specific condition is satisfied. This will
The player can estimate the performance information step by step by satisfying a specific condition multiple times, and improve the accuracy of the estimation step by step. can enjoy.

[Appendix A11]
The game according to appendix A8, wherein the visibility state control means (51) moves the visibility restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A11, when a specific condition is satisfied, the visibility restricting means is moved from the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized to the second position where the performance information is entirely visible. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A12]
The visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has passed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A8 to A11 characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A12, the visual recognition restricting means returns to the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game machine started to move from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition restricting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by a player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix A13]
a game board (31) on which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3
13-316) and
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (3
63) and
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball enters the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, the visual recognition restricting means is moved in a predetermined direction when a game ball enters the special discharge port, and the visual recognition area of the performance information is expanded. Therefore, not only the result of transition determination by the transition determination means but also whether or not the game ball enters the special discharge port can be focused on to enjoy the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A14]
The visual recognition restricting means (39) is capable of accommodating a game ball entered into the special discharge port (363), and contains the game ball when moved to the second position by the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A13, characterized in that game balls can be discharged.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the game ball of the visibility restriction means is discharged when the visibility restriction means is moved to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the visibility restricting means.

[Appendix A15]
The at least one winning opening (313-316) includes a variable winning opening (316) that allows entry of game balls in the special game,
A normal ball entrance (
387) and the distribution device (3
6), the gaming machine according to appendix A13 or appendix A14, further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15, in a special game in which a game ball can be entered into the variable winning hole, the game ball is distributed between the normal ball entry hole and the special discharge hole by the distribution device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual recognition state of the performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to guess or grasp the performance information is given in the special game, so that the pleasure of guessing or grasping the performance information can be given to the special game, in which the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Appendix A16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
The first winning hole (314) can enter a game ball hit to the left side area of the game board (31),
The variable winning hole (316) can enter the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31),
The sorting device (36) distributes the game balls launched to the right side area to the normal ball entrance (387).
) and the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A16, since the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board can enter the first winning hole, it is necessary to perform a so-called left-handed shot in order to receive the transition to the special game. There is On the other hand, since the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can enter the variable winning hole, it is necessary to hit right in the special game. A sorting device provided with a special discharge port that can expect a change in the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can distribute the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual recognition state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, and the visual recognition state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, since the visual recognition state of the performance information can change when hitting the right hand in a special game, etc., the result of the transition determination causes the player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information to transition to the special game. Motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing can be given.

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A13 to A16, wherein the special discharge port (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal ball entry port (387).

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to appendix A17, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entrance (387).

[Appendix A19]
The gaming machine according to appendix A17 or appendix A18, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entrance (387).

[Appendix A20]
The game according to any one of appendices A17 to A19, wherein the sorting device (36) has inhibition means (365) for inhibiting entry of game balls into the special discharge port (363). machine.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the blocking means (365) is a wall surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the gaming machines according to appendices A17 to A21, it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the special discharge port than it is to enter the normal ball entrance, so it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, when the ball output performance is low, for example, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player can easily grasp that the probability of advantageous determination is low, so that the game on the gaming machine 10 can be stopped early. can be suppressed.

[Appendix A22]
The visual recognition restricting means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual recognition restriction means by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information.

[Appendix A23]
The game machine according to appendix A22, wherein the visual recognition restricting means (39A) is a translucent display device capable of changing light shielding properties under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by lowering the light shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device,
A state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized can be realized.

[Appendix A24]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see, and the performance information display means ( 37a) changing the visibility state of the performance information to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entirety of the performance information displayed in 37a) is visible;
The visible region of the translucent display device (39A) is changed step by step each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visibility restricting means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix A23, characterized in that the game machine is expanded to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24, since the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded each time the specific condition is satisfied, the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. Enlarged. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, so that the user can enjoy guessing the performance information in the process. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of areas that make part of the performance information visible in a predetermined order,
Supplementary note A24, wherein the visibility state control means (51) makes part of the performance information visible in one or more of the plurality of areas each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the plurality of areas are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting regions,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25 or appendix A26, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

In the gaming machines according to appendices A25 to A27, part of the performance information is visible in one or more of the plurality of areas on the translucent display device each time a specific condition is satisfied. The performance information displayed on the information display means gradually becomes visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clearer gradually, so that the user can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information can be comprehended. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A28]
The visible state control means (51) controls the translucent display device (39A) to make the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or invisible when the specific condition is satisfied. Characterized by changing from a first state (visibility level 0) in which visibility is difficult to see to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entirety of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible. The gaming machine according to Appendix A22.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device changes from a light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see to a transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has passed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A22 to A28 characterized.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29, the visual recognition restricting means returns to the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined period of time has passed since the game machine started to move from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition restricting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by a player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting regions,
Supplementary notes A22 to A22, characterized in that the performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information in the light emitting colors or flashing patterns of the plurality of light-emitting regions when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A29.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30, the specific performance information can be easily indicated by the light emission color or blinking pattern of the light-emitting region of the performance information display means.

[Appendix A31]
Further comprising transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The specific conditions are
the number of times the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number;
The result of the transition determination does not cause the transition to the special game state for a predetermined number of times in succession,
The result of the transition determination with the transition to the special game state reaches a predetermined number of times,
The total number of game balls shot to the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls shot to the game area of the game board (31) and the plurality of winning holes (3
13 to 316), wherein the difference between the total number of payout balls and the total number of payout balls exceeds a predetermined number.

In the gaming machine pertaining to appendix A31, performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when a specific condition is satisfied. be possible. As a result, the player can anticipate the timing at which the performance information will be displayed and look forward to the arrival of that timing as he progresses through the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Appendix B1]
a game board (31) on which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3
13-316) and
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (363) provided above the game area than at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) and discharging game balls to the back side of the game board;
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) serving as an indicator of ball payout performance;
performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
7a) and
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
41) and
visibility restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see;
Based on the entry of the game ball into the special discharge port (363), the visibility restriction means (39, 39
a visibility state control means (51) for controlling A) and making at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the user can enjoy guessing the performance information based on the visible part. Further, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized, the performance information can be grasped. Therefore, the possibility of estimating or grasping the performance information improves the playability, and motivates the player to continue playing the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix B1, at least part of the performance information can be visually recognized by entering a game ball into the special discharge port. Therefore, since the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the special outlet, the amusement of the game is improved.

[Appendix B2]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the change decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, the performance information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the information on the advantageous determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. Part or all of the information about the advantageous decision probability is displayed on the performance information display means, so that the player can enjoy guessing the advantageous decision probability, and if the advantageous decision probability can be grasped, the advantageous decision probability is displayed. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on.

[Appendix B3]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of game balls according to the winning hole type based on the entry of the game balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball-out performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize-winning holes (313 to 316).

The gaming machine according to appendix B3 includes performance information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one winning hole among the plurality of winning holes. As a result, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning holes is displayed on the performance information display means. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings among the gaming machines. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, and if the ball payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether

[Appendix B4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. further comprising a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments performed by the transition judgment means (41) with the ball as a trigger,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of unit judgments calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the susceptibility of the transition determination in the normal game state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). Therefore, by displaying part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments, the player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, so that the player can know the ease of receiving the transition judgment. Become. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
With respect to the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31), the number of payout balls of game balls to the entry of game balls to the first prize winning port (314) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) further comprising a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of game balls to the number of putout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words, the ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the ball payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing so. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball output rate, and if the ball output rate can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the ball output rate. Granted.

[Appendix B6]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) Further comprising a continuous role ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous role ratio which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous role product ratio calculated by the continuous role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B6, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. Here, the continuous accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio occupied by the number of balls. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency with which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio in the special game state), and the ease of winning the variable winning opening (the number of balls released in the special game state). rate)
is an indicator of Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (percentage of stays in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize in the variable prize winning opening. As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination according to 1), and a game ball can be entered by the support of the electric accessory, and the transition determination means (41) by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to perform transition determination, and a variable winning port (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the number of game balls entering the second winning hole (315); ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the role product ratio calculated by the role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, the performance information includes information regarding the role product ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency (
stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state ball rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game ( stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix B8]
The at least one winning opening (313-316) includes a variable winning opening (316) that allows entry of game balls in the special game,
A normal ball entrance (387) for guiding a game ball to a position where the game ball can enter the variable winning opening (316)
, and the special discharge port (363), further comprising a distribution device (36) for distributing game balls to one of the special discharge ports (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B8, in a special game that allows game balls to enter the variable winning hole,
A game ball is distributed to a normal ball entrance and a special discharge port by a distribution device. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visual recognition state of the performance information. Therefore, an opportunity to guess or grasp the performance information is given in the special game, so that the pleasure of guessing or grasping the performance information can be given to the special game, in which the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Appendix B9]
Further comprising transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition,
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
The first winning hole (314) can enter a game ball hit to the left side area of the game board (31),
The variable winning hole (316) can enter the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board (31),
The sorting device (36) distributes the game balls launched to the right side area to the normal ball entrance (387).
) and the special outlet (363).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9, since the game ball launched to the left side area of the game board can enter the first winning hole, in order to receive the transition to the special game, it is necessary to hit so-called left. There is On the other hand, since the game ball launched to the right side area of the game board can enter the variable winning hole,
In the special game, it is necessary to hit the so-called right hand. A sorting device provided with a special discharge port that can expect a change in the visual recognition state of the performance information due to the entry of the game ball can distribute the game ball hit to the right side area of the game board to the special discharge port. Therefore, the visual recognition state of the performance information does not change in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, and the visual recognition state of the performance information may change in the special game. In this way, since the visual recognition state of the performance information can change when hitting the right hand in a special game, etc., the result of the transition determination causes the player who is interested in guessing or grasping the performance information to transition to the special game. Motivation to continue the game until it becomes a thing can be given.

[Appendix B10]
The gaming machine according to appendix B8 or appendix B9, wherein the special outlet (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal ball inlet (387).

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entrance (387).

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10 or appendix B11, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entrance (387).

[Appendix B13]
The game according to any one of appendices B10 to B12, wherein the sorting device (36) has inhibition means (365) for inhibiting entry of game balls into the special discharge port (363). machine.

[Appendix B14]
The game machine according to appendix B13, wherein the blocking means (365) is a wall surrounding the special discharge port (363).

In the game machines according to appendices B10 to B14, it is difficult for game balls to enter the special discharge openings compared to the normal ball entry openings, so it is not easy to grasp the performance information. Therefore, for example, when the probability of advantageous determination is low, the player can easily grasp that the probability of advantageous determination is low, thereby suppressing early termination of the game on the gaming machine 10 .

[Appendix C1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) serving as an indicator of ball payout performance;
performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
7a) and
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
41) and
visibility restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see;
Visualization state control means ( 51) and
with
A gaming machine characterized in that the visual recognition restriction means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance of the gaming machine during play based on the visible part. In addition, when all the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized, it is possible to comprehend the performance of the gaming machine during play. Therefore, by being able to estimate or grasp the ball output performance of the gaming machine during play, the playability is improved, and it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by controlling the visual recognition restricting means by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, a part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visibility state of the performance information.

[Appendix C2]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed from the first state (visibility level 0) in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see, and the performance information display means ( 37a) changing the visibility state of the performance information to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entirety of the performance information displayed in 37a) is visible;
The visible region of the translucent display device (39A) is changed step by step each time the specific condition is satisfied until the visibility restricting means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the game machine is enlarged to .

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the transparent area in the translucent display device is expanded step by step each time the specific condition is satisfied, so the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually increases. Enlarged. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, so that the user can enjoy guessing the performance information in the process. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The game machine according to appendix C1 or appendix C2, wherein the visual recognition restricting means (39A) is a translucent display device capable of changing light shielding properties under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by lowering the light shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized.

[Appendix C4]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of areas that make part of the performance information visible in a predetermined order,
Supplementary note C3, wherein the visibility state control means (51) makes a part of the performance information visible in one or more of the plurality of areas each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein the plurality of areas are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting regions,
The gaming machine according to appendix C4 or appendix C5, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C4 to C6, part of the performance information is visible in one or more of the plurality of areas on the translucent display device each time a specific condition is satisfied.
The performance information displayed on the performance information display means gradually becomes visible. As a result, the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clearer gradually, so that the user can enjoy guessing the performance information until the performance information can be comprehended. As a result, the motivation to continue the game until the performance information can be confirmed can be improved, and the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The visible state control means (51) controls the translucent display device (39A) to make the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or invisible when the specific condition is satisfied. Characterized by changing from a first state (visibility level 0) in which visibility is difficult to see to a second state (visibility level 4) in which the entirety of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is visible. The gaming machine according to appendix C1.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, when a specific condition is satisfied, the translucent display device changes from a light-shielding state in which the performance information is invisible or difficult to see to a transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible. . Therefore, since the game property that the performance information can be visually recognized immediately when the specific condition is satisfied is provided, the interest in the game is improved.

[Appendix C8]
The visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has passed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C7 characterized by the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C8, the visual recognition restricting means returns to the first position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized after a lapse of a predetermined period of time from the start of movement from the first position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition restricting means from being present for a long time in a position where part or all of the performance information can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance information from being guessed or grasped by a player who is not playing a game.

[Appendix C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light-emitting regions,
Supplementary notes C1 to Supplementary notes characterized in that the performance information display means (37a) displays the specific performance information by the luminescent colors or flashing patterns of the plurality of light-emitting regions when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9, the specific performance information can be clearly indicated simply by the luminescent color or blinking pattern of the luminescent area of the performance information display means.

[Appendix C10]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the change decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C9, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) regarding the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10, the performance information includes information relating to the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the information on the advantageous determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. Part or all of the information about the advantageous decision probability is displayed on the performance information display means, so that the player can enjoy guessing the advantageous decision probability, and if the advantageous decision probability can be grasped, the advantageous decision probability is displayed. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on.

[Appendix C11]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of game balls according to the winning hole type based on the entry of the game balls,
The game according to any one of appendices C1 to C10, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning openings (313 to 316). machine.

The gaming machine according to appendix C11 includes performance information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one winning hole among a plurality of winning holes. As a result, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning holes is displayed on the performance information display means. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings among the gaming machines. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, and if the ball payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether

[Appendix C12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. further comprising a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments performed by the transition judgment means (41) with the ball as a trigger,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of unit judgments calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by displaying part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments, the player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, so that the player can know the ease of receiving the transition judgment. Become. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix C13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
With respect to the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31), the number of payout balls of game balls to the entry of game balls to the first prize winning port (314) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) further comprising a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of game balls to the number of putout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C13, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words,
The ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the ball payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing so. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball output rate, and if the ball output rate can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the ball output rate. Granted.

[Appendix C14]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) Further comprising a continuous role ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous role ratio which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous role product ratio calculated by the continuous role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C14, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. here,
The continuous accessory ratio is the total number of paid out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering multiple winning openings. ratio. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency (
It is an index showing the rate of stay in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize to the variable winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (percentage of stays in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize in the variable prize winning opening. As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix C15]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination according to 1), and a game ball can be entered by the support of the electric accessory, and the transition determination means (41) by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to perform transition determination, and a variable winning port (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the number of game balls entering the second winning hole (315); ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the role product ratio calculated by the role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C15, the performance information includes information on the role product ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game ( stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix D1]
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) serving as an indicator of ball payout performance;
performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
7a) and
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
41) and
Visibility restriction means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see;
visibility state control means (51) for controlling the visibility restriction means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied and making at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible; and,
Abnormality judgment means (51) for judging whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the desired visual recognition state of the performance information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix D2]
The apparatus further comprises countermeasure processing execution means (51) for executing countermeasure processing for the abnormality when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to appendix D2.

In the gaming machines according to appendices D1 and D2, it is possible to determine whether or not the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the desired visual recognition state of the performance information. This makes it possible to deal with the case where the visual recognition state of the performance information is different from the intended one.

[Appendix D3]
The visibility restriction means (39A) is a forced visibility restriction means (39A) different from the visibility restriction means (39), the visibility of which can be changed by the control by the visibility state control means (51).
and,
Forced visibility state control means (51) for controlling visibility in the forced visibility restriction means (39A)
and,
further comprising
The visual recognition restriction means (39) controls the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized, and the performance information display means (37a).
) is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information displayed in
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position,
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position, the countermeasure execution means (51) controls the performance information display means (37a). The forced visibility restriction means (3
9A), the gaming machine according to appendix D2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, when the visibility restriction means cannot be moved to the second position where the performance information is invisible or difficult to see on the performance information display means, the performance information on the performance information display means is displayed by the forced visibility restriction means. Information can be invisible or difficult to see. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means is maintained.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from guessing or recognizing the performance information as part or all of the performance information on the performance information display means becomes visible even though a specific condition is not satisfied.

[Appendix D4]
The game machine according to appendix D3, wherein the forced visibility limiting means (39A) is capable of changing visible light transmittance under control by the forced visibility state control means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visibility state control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the forced visual recognition restriction means (39A) is movable to a position covering the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the forced visual recognition state control means (51). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving to a position where the performance information display means is covered by the forced visibility state control means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The forced visibility limiting means (39A) includes a light source controlled by the forced visibility state control means (51) and an optical member into which light emitted from the light source is incident and capable of diffusing or guiding the incident light. The gaming machine according to appendix D3, characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. With this simple configuration and control,
It is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means is maintained.

[Appendix D7]
The forced viewing state control means (51) controls the forced viewing state control means (51) when the abnormality determining means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the viewing state of the performance information and when the specific condition is satisfied. According to any one of appendices D3 to D6, characterized in that visibility restriction means (39A) is controlled to make at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D7, at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by controlling the forced visibility restriction means when an abnormality occurs in the visibility state of the performance information. It is said that That is, when a drive abnormality of the visibility limiting means occurs, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced visibility limiting means instead of the visibility limiting means. Accordingly, even when the visibility of the performance information cannot be changed by the visibility restriction means, the visibility of the performance information can be changed by the forced visibility restriction means.

[Appendix D8]
The visual recognition restriction means (39) controls the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) at a first position (upper limit position) at which the performance information is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized, and the performance information display means (37a).
) is movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the entire performance information displayed in
In the performance information display means (37a), at least the visual recognition restriction means (39)
is movable to a position hidden by the visibility restricting means (39) when in position,
The abnormality determination means (51) can determine that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position,
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visibility restriction means (39) cannot move to the second position, the countermeasure execution means (51) controls the performance information display means (37a). is moved to a position hidden by the visibility restricting means (39).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information is visible on the performance information display means from being maintained by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D9]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes detection means (40A) capable of detecting that the visibility restriction means (39A) is at the second position,
The abnormality determination means (51) controls the visibility restriction means (39) to move to the second position by the visibility state control means (51). (39A) is not detected to be at the second position, it is determined that the visibility restricting means (39) cannot move to the second position.
3. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D8.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9, it is possible to determine whether or not the visibility restricting means cannot move to the second position by the detecting means. Thereby, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visibility restricting means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D10]
The abnormality determination means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39) after the main power source of the game machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D9, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restricting means after the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on until the game can be started. This will
It is possible to prevent a state in which a game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means, it becomes possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D11]
The abnormality determination means (51) determines whether the visual recognition restriction means (39) is activated after the start of the game is enabled.
).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means after the start of the game. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means after the start of the game is enabled, the abnormality of the visual recognition restricting means can be found and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix D12]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D11, further comprising notifying means (341, 26) for notifying that the game is in progress.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D12, when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended one, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means, and it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix D13]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D12, further comprising selection means (341, 20) for enabling selection of whether to enable execution of a game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, it is possible to select whether or not to allow execution of a game when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended one. As a result, when there is no abnormality other than the visibility restricting means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side with the determination of whether or not to allow the player to use the game machine.

[Appendix D14]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the change decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to attachments D1 to D13, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D14, the performance information includes information relating to the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the information on the advantageous determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. Part or all of the information about the advantageous decision probability is displayed on the performance information display means, so that the player can enjoy guessing the advantageous decision probability, and if the advantageous decision probability can be grasped, the advantageous decision probability is displayed. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on.

[Appendix D15]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of game balls according to the winning hole type based on the entry of the game balls,
The game according to any one of attachments D1 to D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). machine.

The gaming machine according to appendix D15 includes performance information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one winning hole among the plurality of winning holes. As a result, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning holes is displayed on the performance information display means. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings among the gaming machines. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, and if the ball payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether

[Appendix D16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. further comprising a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments performed by the transition judgment means (41) with the ball as a trigger,
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of unit judgments calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D16, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by displaying part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments, the player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, so that the player can know the ease of receiving the transition judgment. Become. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix D17]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
With respect to the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31), the number of payout balls of game balls to the entry of game balls to the first prize winning port (314) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) further comprising a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of game balls to the number of putout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D17, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words,
The ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the ball payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing so. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball output rate, and if the ball output rate can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the ball output rate. Granted.

[Appendix D18]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) Further comprising a continuous role ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous role ratio which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous role product ratio calculated by the continuous role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D18, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. here,
The continuous accessory ratio is the total number of paid out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering multiple winning openings. ratio. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency (
It is an index showing the rate of stay in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize to the variable winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (percentage of stays in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize in the variable prize winning opening. As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix D19]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination according to 1), and a game ball can be entered by the support of the electric accessory, and the transition determination means (41) by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to perform transition determination, and a variable winning port (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the number of game balls entering the second winning hole (315); ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the role product ratio calculated by the role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D19, the performance information includes information on the role product ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game ( stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Appendix E1]
a game board (31) on which a game area where game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning holes (3
13-316) and
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special discharge port (3
63) and
A storage means (412) for storing performance information (game set value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous role ratio, role ratio, etc.) serving as an indicator of ball payout performance;
performance information display means (3) for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means (412);
7a) and
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means (37a);
41) and
Visibility restriction means (39) capable of making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to see, and accommodating game balls entering the special discharge port (363);
The visibility restriction means (39) on the condition that the game ball is entered into the visibility restriction means (39)
) to make at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible;
Abnormality judgment means (51) for judging whether the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is the desired visual recognition state of the performance information;
A first state in which a game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) is permitted to enter the visual recognition restricting means (39); a switching means (319B) capable of switching between a second state for restricting entry of a ball into the visibility restricting means (39);
The switching control means (51) for controlling the switching means (319B) to the second state when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target visual recognition state. 51) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the visual recognition restricting means (39) is capable of ejecting the housed game balls when moved to the second position by the visual recognition state control means (51).

In the gaming machines according to appendices E1 and E2, when it is determined that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the desired visual recognition state, the switching means is set to the second state, thereby allowing the game to be played by the visual recognition restriction means. Ball entry is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the game ball entering the visual recognition restricting means. For example, when the game ball of the visibility restriction means is ejected with the movement of the visibility restriction means to the second position as a trigger, if the visibility restriction means cannot move to the second position where the game ball can be ejected, the visibility A game ball is prevented from entering the restricting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the capacity from remaining in the visual recognition restricting means, and to prevent game balls from overflowing from the visual recognition restricting means. Therefore, even if there is a driving abnormality in which the visual recognition restricting means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute the game as usual in the gaming machine.

[Appendix E3]
The switching means (319B) has a third position (standby position) that allows a game ball entered into the special outlet (363) to enter the visual recognition restricting means (39), and the special outlet. (36
3) is movable between a fourth position (operating position) for restricting entry of a game ball entered into the visual recognition restriction means (39);
The switching control means (51) controls the visual recognition restriction means (
39) is not in the second position, the switching means (319B) is switched to the third position.
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, characterized in that the game machine is moved from the position to the fourth position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position, it is possible to restrict entry of a game ball that has entered the special discharge port into the visibility restricting means. Thus, with a simple configuration and control, entry of a game ball into the visibility restriction means can be restricted when an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means.

[Appendix E4]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes detection means (40B) capable of detecting that the visibility restriction means (39A) is at the second position,
The abnormality determination means (51) controls the visibility restriction means (39) to move to the second position by the visibility state control means (51). (39A) is not detected to be at the second position, the game according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that it is determined that the visibility restricting means (39) is not at the second position. machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, it can be determined by the detecting means that the visibility restricting means is not at the second position. Thereby, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the visibility restricting means by a simple configuration and control.

[Appendix E5]
The abnormality determination means (51) determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39) after the main power source of the game machine is turned on until the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restricting means after the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on and before the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent a state in which the game can be started in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means, it becomes possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E6]
The abnormality determination means (51) according to any one of additions E1 to E5, characterized in that, after the game is started, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visibility restriction means (39). game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means after the game is started. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means after the start of the game is enabled, the abnormality of the visual recognition restricting means can be found and the abnormality can be dealt with.

[Appendix E7]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality judgment means (51) judges that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, characterized by further comprising notifying means (341, 26) for notifying that the game is in progress.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7, when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended one, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means, and it is possible to deal with the abnormality.

[Appendix E8]
When the abnormality determination means (51) determines that the visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the desired visual recognition state of the performance information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E7, further comprising selection means (341, 20) for enabling selection of whether or not execution of a game is permitted.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, it is possible to select whether or not to allow the execution of the game when the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the intended one. As a result, there is no abnormality other than the visibility restriction means,
When there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the game hall side with the decision as to whether or not the player is allowed to use the game machine.

[Appendix E9]
Transition determination means (41) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantageous decision probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantageous decision probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition decision by the change decision means (41) from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous decision probabilities. ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E8, wherein the performance information includes information (game set value) on the advantageous judgment probability set by the advantageous judgment probability setting means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9, the performance information includes information regarding the probability of advantageous determination that greatly affects the ball-out performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball payout performance based on the information on the advantageous determination probability, it is possible to suggest the ball payout performance based on an index that more appropriately reflects the ball payout performance of the gaming machine. Part or all of the information about the advantageous decision probability is displayed on the performance information display means, so that the player can enjoy guessing the advantageous decision probability, and if the advantageous decision probability can be grasped, the advantageous decision probability is displayed. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the gaming machine based on.

[Appendix E10]
It further comprises a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) for paying out a certain number of game balls according to the winning hole type based on the entry of the game balls,
The game according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, wherein the performance information includes information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of prize winning holes (313 to 316). machine.

The gaming machine according to appendix E10 includes performance information indicating ball payout performance based on at least one winning hole among the plurality of winning holes. As a result, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball payout performance based on the winning holes is displayed on the performance information display means. It is possible to estimate or recognize the payout performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance for the winning openings among the gaming machines. As a result, the player can enjoy guessing the ball payout performance based on the prize winning opening, and if the ball payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the player can continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. You will be given the opportunity to decide whether

[Appendix E11]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
1) includes a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination,
A game ball enters the first winning port (314) until the difference ball number reaches a predetermined number of balls minus or until the number of game balls shot into the game board (31) reaches a specific ball number. further comprising a unit judgment number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit judgments performed by the transition judgment means (41) with the ball as a trigger,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit judgments calculated by the number of unit judgments calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11, the performance information includes performance information regarding the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit judgments is the number of game balls entering the first winning hole until the number of difference balls reaches the minus number of predetermined balls or the number of shot balls of game balls reaches the specific number of balls. This is the number of times transition determination is performed. In other words, the number of unit determinations is an index that indicates the easiness of the transition determination in the normal game state (the state in which the low-probability mode is not the time-saving mode). Therefore, by displaying part or all of the information on the number of unit judgments, the player can guess or recognize the information on the number of unit judgments, so that the player can know the ease of receiving the transition judgment. Become. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, and when the number of unit judgments can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit judgments. Granted.

[Appendix E12]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game ball, and the transition determination means (41) performs the transition determination according to the entry of the game ball. A first prize winning port (314) that gives a chance, and a general winning port (313) that pays out a specific number of game balls based on the entry of the game ball and has a function different from that of the first prize winning port. including
With respect to the number of shot balls of game balls to the game board (31), the number of payout balls of game balls to the entry of game balls to the first prize winning port (314) and the number of game balls to the general winning port (313) further comprising a payout rate calculation means (41) for calculating a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls of game balls to the number of putout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout ball rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. In other words,
The ball payout rate is an index that indicates the ease of winning the first prize hole and the general prize hole. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the ball payout rate in the performance information, so that the player can guess or recognize the ball payout rate. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing so. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the ball output rate, and if the ball output rate can be grasped, the player has an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine currently being played based on the ball output rate. Granted.

[Appendix E13]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) includes a variable winning hole (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) Further comprising a continuous role ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous role ratio which is a ratio of the number of payout balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous role product ratio calculated by the continuous role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E13, the performance information includes information on the continuous accessory ratio. here,
The continuous accessory ratio is the total number of paid out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering multiple winning openings. ratio. In other words, the continuous role ratio is the frequency (
It is an index showing the rate of stay in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize to the variable winning opening (ball output rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous role ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous role ratio, so that the result of the transition determination causes the transition to the special game. It is possible to know the frequency (percentage of stays in the special game state) and the easiness of winning a prize in the variable prize winning opening. As a result, the player guesses the continuous role ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous role ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous role ratio. given the opportunity to do so.

[Appendix E14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are operated by the transition determination means (4) by entering a game ball.
A first winning port (314) that provides an opportunity to perform the transition determination according to 1), and a game ball can be entered by the support of the electric accessory, and the transition determination means (41) by the transition determination means (41) by the entry of the game ball. Including a second winning port (315) that gives an opportunity to perform transition determination, and a variable winning port (316) that allows game balls to enter in the special game state,
In the total number of payout balls, which is the sum of the number of payout balls for game balls entering the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), the number of game balls entering the variable winning hole (316) a role ratio calculation means (41) for calculating a role ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls and the number of payout balls with respect to the number of game balls entering the second winning hole (315); ,
further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the role product ratio calculated by the role product ratio calculation means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E14, the performance information includes information on the role product ratio. Here, the accessory ratio is the total number of paid-out balls, which is the sum of the number of paid-out game balls with respect to the number of game balls entering a plurality of winning holes. It is the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of incoming balls. In other words, the role ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) that receives the support of the electric role, and It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (ball payout rate in the special game state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the role ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the role ratio, so the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game ( stay ratio in special game state), stay ratio in support game state (time-saving game state) receiving support from electric accessories, and ease of winning in variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special game state It becomes possible to know the ball rate). As a result, the player has an opportunity to enjoy guessing the character ratio and, if the character ratio can be grasped, to decide whether to continue the game on the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

10: Gaming Machine 313: General Winning Port 314: First Winning Port 315: Second Winning Port 316: Variable Winning Port 341: Symbol Display Part 35a: Special Out Ball Sensor 36: Creon Device 363: Special Out Ball Gate 364: Special Out ball passage 365: Inhibition wall 367: Normal entrance 368: Normal passage 37a: Special main display section 38: Sub-image display section 39: Retention box 39A: Translucent monitor 319: Discharge port 319B: Forced discharge member 4: Main controller 40A: Upper limit position detection sensor 40B: Lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: Game information storage area 4A: Performance information display device 43: Performance display monitor 44: Performance display switch 45: Game set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp controller 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed, based on the establishment of a determination condition;
storage means for storing performance information serving as an indicator of ball output performance;
performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means;
a first position where the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is invisible or difficult to see from a specific front direction; visibility limiting means movable between a second position visible from
a regulating means for limiting movement of the visual recognition restricting means from the first position to the second position;
with
The visibility restriction means makes at least part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible from the specific direction of the front when a specific condition is satisfied,
When the movement start condition is satisfied in the special game state, it becomes possible to move the visual recognition restricting means from the first position to the second position,
The performance information display means is configured to display the performance information even in a state in which the visibility restriction means is at the first position,
In addition to the performance information display means, a production display means for production is provided,
A game machine, wherein the performance information can be displayed by the performance information display means even when the performance display is being performed by the performance display means.